Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-XW350
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product.
For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
Trademark of the DVB Digital Video Broadcasting Project
Declaration of Conformity No. 6628, 19th February 2009
This DVD Recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not pay TV or encrypted channels.
Region management information
DVD-Video
Example:
The unit plays DVD-Video marked with labels containing the region number “4” or “ALL”.
2
3
4
ALL
4
GZ
RQT9487-L
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Included accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of June 2009. These may be subject to change.)
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
(N2QAYB000344)
1
Remote control
2
Batteries
for remote control
1
AC mains lead
1
RF coaxial cable
1
Audio/video cable
For use with this unit only.
Do not use it with other
equipment.
Also, do not use cords for
other equipment with this
unit.
The remote control information
Batteries
Use
ꢁInsert so the poles (+ and –) match those in the remote control.
Remote control signal sensor
20
20
R6/LR6, AA
30
ꢁUse alkaline or manganese batteries.
ꢁDo not mix old and new batteries.
ꢁDo not use different types at the same time.
ꢁDo not heat or expose to flame.
30
7 m directly in front of the unit
ꢁDo not leave the batteries in an automobile exposed to direct
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
ꢁDo not take apart or short circuit.
ꢁDo not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
ꢁDo not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Remote control operations (➡ 12)
RQT9487
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
Getting started
Title
Getting started
Characteristics of this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Recording
Important notes for recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Advanced recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Recording modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2 programmes simultaneous recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Operation during Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
HDD
Quick Start Guide
HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Recording and copying programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play. . . . . . . . . . . .8
Play-only discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Discs that cannot be played. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
USB memory and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
USB memories you can use on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Cards you can use on this unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Control reference guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Easy access to various functions
Advanced timer recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Timer recording Using the TV Guide System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . .33
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
TV Guide data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Playing back
Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Display the subtitle during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play
—FUNCTION MENU Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card) . . . . . . . .15
Inserting discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Inserting, removing the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Inserting, removing the SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Disc and card care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Connecting a television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia
Interface) cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
—DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
HDD
Switching of the Navigator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
HDD
Playback the title that was viewed once
To sort the titles for easy searching
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
HDD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
HDD
To play grouped titles
To edit the group of titles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
HDD
Playback of the High Definition Video (AVCHD) . . . . . .39
Playback of the playlist created on
other equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Playing DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Playing DivX video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Basic operations
Editing
Watching digital broadcasts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Switching audio of the TV broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
To show subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
To select subtitle language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
To show Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Playing DVD-Video/Playing recorded
Editing titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Create/Playback/Edit of the Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Create Chapter Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Editing and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Copying
video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Playing DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Playing recorded video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
HDD
Copying titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Copy Title Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Copying using the copying list—Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Recording television programmes
To specify a time to stop recording
. . . . . . . . . . . 22
—One Touch Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
HDD
Timer recording (Manual timer recording)
. . . . 23
With Other Equipment
Deleting titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Deleting during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Copying titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Recording broadcasts from external equipment. . . . . .53
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
DV Automatic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Recording via AV2 input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Flexible Recording via AV input
(Recording that fits the size of a new DVD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Copy the HD Video (AVCHD format) or the SD Video
(MPEG2 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Copying HD Video (AVCHD format). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Copying SD Video (MPEG2 format). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
RQT9487
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Still pictures
Others
Still pictures
Convenient functions
Playing still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Useful functions during still picture play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Editing still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Still pictures operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Copying still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Enjoying VIERA CASTTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Linked operations with the TV
(VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Convenient functions to playback and viewing. . . . . . .76
Using on-screen menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
FUNCTION MENU window/Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . .79
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
To pause the TV programme you are watching
—Copy All Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Copying new still pictures on the SD card
—Copy New Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Deleting still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
—Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Disc and card management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Setting the protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Providing a name for a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Deleting all titles—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Enabling the unit’s recording function—Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Selecting the background style—Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
—Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Finalising—Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
HDD/Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Music
Music
Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Playing MP3 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Playing music CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Playing music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Editing music/playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Editing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Album and track operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Register track to Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Editing Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Playlist operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
About the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Copying music from a disc or a USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
HDD
Deleting music
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Software (Firmware) Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Reference
Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO
terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal . . . . . . . . . .95
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television
and receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Connecting an Analogue television and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Connecting a Digital television and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Operations that can be performed simultaneously . . 99
Operations that can be performed while recording or copying a
title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Starting of the timer recording while executing other
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
When removing a recorded disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Safety precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
About descriptions in these operating instructions
y Pages to be referred to are indicated as “➡ {{”.
RQT9487
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
This unit can record to HDD and copy to the following recording media.
Internal
DDVVDD--RRAAMM DDVVDD--RR
DDVVDD--RR DDLL DDVVDD--RRWW
++RRWW
HHDDDD
++RR
++RR DDLL
Recordings can only be made to HDD in DR mode first, with the same quality as broadcasted, then they can be copied to discs.
Instant record
It can only record to HDD by pressing [ REC].
*
Discs
HDD
REC
Record to the HDD and
then copy to the disc.
Can do
Cannot do
Timer record
It can only record to HDD when using timer recording.
Discs
HDD
Timer Recording Remain HDD 30:30 DR
FRI 23.01.2009 8:59
All DVB Channels
Channel Date/Week Start Stop
Drive
HDD
Mode
21
SAT 10.01 08:59
--
DR
Record to the HDD and
then copy to the disc.
[Prog.Name]
Programme Name
TVNZ SPORT EXTRA
Can do
Cannot do
Favourites/AV
1 day/Weekly
RETURN
RQT9487
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and copying programmes
This unit will record the high definition quality programmes of the digital broadcast onto the HDD with high quality
image and audio as they were broadcasted.
If copying is performed on those programmes, they are copied in standard definition.
ꢂ
Programmes in high definition (HD) quality
Goal!
Recording
ꢁRecord as high definition (HD) quality
(the same quality of the broadcast)
ꢁAll subtitles and multiple audio are recorded
(selectable during playback).
HHDD
Goal!
DR mode
COPY
Time and quality of recording varies depending on the
recording mode. (➡ 28, Recording modes)
Discs
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode
ꢁCopy as standard definition (SD) quality
ꢁCopy in Normal Speed mode when copying
the title recorded in DR mode on HDD
ꢁSubtitles cannot be copied.
ꢁOnly one audio can be copied for the
multiple audio.
ꢂ
It will also record standard definition programmes of the digital broadcast with the same quality of image and audio as broadcasted.
RQT9487
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
(ꢃ: Possible, –: Impossible)
Disc type
Hard disk drive (HDD)
HDD
Standard symbol
Data that can be recorded and played
Quality in which video is recorded
Recording mode in which video is recordedꢂ
Rewritable
Video/Still picture/Music
High definition (HD) quality/Standard definition (SD) quality
DR, HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
ꢃ
ꢃ
Timer recording
ꢂ
Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods. For details, please refer to the respective operating.
RQT9487
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc type
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DVD-RW
RAM
-R
DVD-V
-R DL
-RW(V)
Standard symbol
before finalisation
before
before
finalisation
after finalisation finalisation
DVD-V
DVD-V
after finalisation
after finalisation
Data that can be recorded and
played
Video
Still picture
Video
Quality in which video is recorded
Standard definition (SD) quality
Recording mode in which video is
recordedÚ
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
{
{
Rewritable
–
–
Timer recording
Play on other players
RAM
can be played
back on Panasonic
DVD recorders and
DVD-RAM compatible
DVD players.
y Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment.
-R DL
y
can be played back only on equipment compatible with this disc.
Note
Cartridge discs can be
used (➡ 80).
–
Disc type
+R
+R DL
+RW
+RW
+R
DVD-V
+R DL
DVD-V
Standard symbol
before finalisation
before finalisation
after finalisation
after finalisation
Data that can be recorded and
played
Video
Quality in which video is recorded
Standard definition (SD) quality
Recording mode in which video is
recordedÚ
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
{
Rewritable
–
Timer recording
Play on other players
–
+RW
y Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment.
can be played back only on equipment compatible with
this disc.
can be played back only
+R DL
y
on equipment compatible with
this disc.
y If the disc failed to play on
other equipment, we
recommend you create top
menu (➡ 82).
Note
y +R +R DL recorded with this unit or with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible.
However, discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.
y 8X Speed +RW disc is not supported.
Ú
Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods. For details, please refer to the respective operating.
Note
y Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be used for recording on this unit.
y This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
y You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
y Recording-restricted or copy-restricted programmes may not be recorded depending on the type of discs (including HDD) or recording mode.
■ Regarding 8 cm Disc
This unit cannot record or edit the 8 cm DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R DL or +RW.
Only playback or copy to the HDD is possible.
RQT9487
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
Play-only discs
Standard
symbol
Disc type
Logo
Uses
High quality movie and music discs
DVD-V
DVD-Video
DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder
ꢁBy formatting (➡ 81) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video
format.
ꢁIt may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for
recording.
DVD-RW (DVD
Video
Recording
format)
-RW(VR)
ꢁDVD-Rꢂand DVD-R DLꢂwith video recorded in DivX
ꢁDVD-Rꢂand DVD-R DLꢂwith music recorded in MP3
ꢁDVD-Rꢂand DVD-R DLꢂwith still pictures recorded in JPEG
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DivX, MP3,
JPEG
ꢁRecorded audio and music (including CD-R/RWꢂ)
You can copy tracks to this unit’s HDD.
CD
CD
ꢁCD-Rꢂand CD-RWꢂwith video recorded in DivX
ꢁCD-Rꢂand CD-RWꢂwith music recorded in MP3
ꢁCD-Rꢂand CD-RWꢂwith still pictures recorded in JPEG
DivX, MP3,
JPEG
–
–
Disc with high
definition
video
Following disc can be played.
ꢁDVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW
ꢁFinalise (➡ 114) the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R or +R DL with
the same equipment that was used to record.
(AVCHD)
AVCHD
recorded by
Panasonic’s
video camera,
etc.
ꢂ
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
ꢁThe producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
ꢁOperation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Discs that cannot be played
ꢁBlu-ray Disc (BD-Video, BD-RE, BD-R)
ꢁ2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
ꢁ3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
ꢁDVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalised (➡ 114).
ꢁDVD-Video with a region number other than “4” or “ALL”
ꢁDVD-Audio
ꢁHD DVD
ꢁDVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD, SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, Video CD, etc.
RQT9487
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB memory and card information
USB memories you can use on this unit
USB memories can only be used for playback or copy to HDD or discs.
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class and digital camera that use PTP
protocol:
–USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.
ꢁUSB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.
ꢁUSB memories that support bulk only transfer.
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
Compatible USB memories
ꢁDigital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not
supported.
ꢁMTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.
ꢁA multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
ꢁUDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.
ꢁDepending on the sector size, some files may not work.
ꢁOnly the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Format
Indicated in these instructions
by
USB
Data that can be played
DivX, MP3, Still pictures (JPEG)
MP3
ꢁIt can be copied to HDD.
Still pictures (JPEG)
ꢁIt can be copied to HDD or DVD-RAM.
Data that can be copied
SD Video (MPEG2 format)
HD Video (AVCHD format)
ꢁIf a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. is connected to this unit’s USB port:
– you can copy the SD Video shot with the camera to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM. (➡ 57)
– you can copy the HD Video shot with the camera to this unit’s HDD. (➡ 56)
ꢁDespite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
Note
ꢁThis unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
Cards you can use on this unit
SD cards can be used for playback, copy to HDD or discs or copy from HDD or discs.
SD Memory Cardꢂ1 (from 8 MB to 2 GB)
SDHC Memory Cardꢂ2 (from 4 GB to 32 GB)
ꢂ1 Including miniSD Card and microSD Card
Type
ꢂ2 Including miniSDHC Card and microSDHC Card
The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.
Indicated in these instructions
by
SD
Still pictures (JPEG)
HD Video (AVCHD format)
Data that can be played
Still pictures (JPEG)
ꢁIt can be copied to/from HDD or DVD-RAM.
SD Video (MPEG2 format)
HD Video (AVCHD format)
Data that can be copied
ꢁSD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (➡ 57)
ꢁHD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD. (➡ 56)
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
Instructions
ꢂ1 A miniSD Card and a microSD Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.
ꢂ2 A miniSDHC Card and microSDHC Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.
Suitable SD cards
ꢁWhen using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display the SDHC logo can be used.
ꢁUseable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
ꢁPlease confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs
(This site is in English only.)
ꢁIf the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a PC, you
may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (➡ 81, 114).
ꢁThis unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards
in FAT32 format.
ꢁSDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory
Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.
ꢁWe recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
ꢁKeep the SD Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
■ Setting the protection
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.
RQT9487
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control reference guide
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on or off (➡ 18)
bo
2 Select drive (HDD, DVD or SD) (➡ 21, 22, 58)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers or
characters (The character buttons may be used when operating
VIERA CAST contents.)
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (➡ 24, 34, 64, 71)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
6 Show digital channel information (➡ 20)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (➡ 35)/Show status messages (➡ 78)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (➡ 13, 36)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (➡ 21, 58, 66)/Top menu (➡ 21)
9 Show OPTION menu (➡ 42, 60, 68)
TV
1
bp
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
2
3
PAGE
CH
abc
def
2
3
1
bq
br
ghi
jkl
mno
4
5
6
This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures,
etc.
bk Colour buttons
Use in accordance with instruction on the screen.
bl Recording functions
p
w
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
7
bs
bt
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
DEL
0
SELECT
4
5
ꢁ[ REC] Start recording (➡ 22)
*
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
ꢁ[REC MODE] Change recording mode (➡ 53)
bm Show teletext (➡ 20)
bn Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (➡ 19, 37)
bo Transmit the remote control signal
bp Television operations (➡ 91)
bq Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(➡ 19, 35)
br Show VIERA CAST (➡ 73)
STOP
PAUSE PLAY/x1.3
STATUS
EXIT
ck
cl
6
7
I
bs Input select (TV, AV1, AV2, or DV) (➡ 19, 22, 53, 54)
bt Skip approx. 1 minute forward (➡ 37)
ck Exit the menu screen
cl Show the TV Guide screen (➡ 19, 32, 35)
cm Show FUNCTION MENU window (➡ 13)
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the
main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
cn Return to previous screen
co Create chapter (➡ 45)
cp Show Timer Recording screen (➡ 23)
cq Skip the specified time (➡ 37)
cr Show on-screen menu (➡ 76)
cs Select audio (➡ 19, 37)
8
9
cm
OK
cn
co
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
bk
bl
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
cp
cq
TEXT
STTL
AUDIO DISPLAY
bm
bn
cr
cs
The unit’s display
1 2 3 4
COPY
SD USB
HDDSDVD
PLAY
8
5 6
1ꢀSD card slot indicator
7
9
This indicator lights up when an SD card is inserted.
2ꢀUSB port indicator
This indicator lights up when a USB memory is inserted.
3 Copying indicator
4 Disc indicator
This indicator lights up when a disc is inserted.
5ꢀDrive (HDD, DVD or SD) indicator
Select “DVD” for any discs. DVD indicator will light up.
6 Remote control signal indicator
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
7 Main display section indicator
Current time/playback counter, various messages.
8ꢀPlayback indicator
9 Timer recording indicator
This indicator lights up when the timer recording standby is activated.
RQT9487
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main unit
1
2
3
4 5
6
7 8 9 bk blbmbn
bo
Pull to flip down the
front panel.
1 Standby/on switch ( ) (➡ 18)
9 USB port (➡ 15)
bk Channel select (➡ 19)
bl Start recording/Specify a time to stop recording (➡ 22)
bm Stop (➡ 22, 36)
8
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of
power.
2 Disc tray (➡ 15)
3 Display (➡ 12)
bn Start play
bo Connection for VCR, Panasonic’s video camera, etc. (➡ 53, 54)
4 Recording indicator
5 Remote control signal sensor
6 Open/close disc tray (➡ 15)
7 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (➡ 54)
8 SD card slot (➡ 15)
Rear panel terminals (➡ 16, 17, 95–98)
Easy access to various functions—FUNCTION MENU Display
You can access the main function quickly and easily.
1 Playback
The DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen or menu screen etc. for
the selected drive or inserted
media will be displayed.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
You can start programming
timer recording or reconfirm and
change the timer recording
settings.
The DELETE Navigator screen
will be displayed.
2 Recording (➡ 23, 34)
3 Delete (➡ 24, 64, 71)
The Copy screen appears.
4 Copy (➡ 50, 62)
HDD
e.g.,
You can easily find programmes
you want to watch and set them
for timer recording.
Select and execute a function
other than those above, such as
recording or setting.
5 TV Guide (➡ 19, 32)
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Time Remaining 30:00 DR
6 Others
1
2
3
4
5
6
Playback
Flexible Recording via AV
input (➡ 55)
Playlists (➡ 39)
DV Automatic Recording
(➡ 54)
Recording
Delete
Copy
Recording via AV2 input
(➡ 55)
TV Guide
Others
Copy New Pictures (➡ 62)
Copy Video (AVCHD)
(➡ 56)
OK
RETURN
Network (➡ 73)
USB device (➡ 40, 56, 57,
58, 62, 65, 70)
DVD Management (➡ 80)
Card Management (➡ 80)
Setup (➡ 83)
RQT9487
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special
device that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
■ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
■ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
■ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
ꢁWhen the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
■ Setup precautions
■ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
ꢁDo not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
ꢁPlace the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,
etc. gets inside the unit.
■ While operating
ꢁDo not place on anything that generates heat like a video
cassette recorder, etc.
ꢁDo not place in an area often subject to
ꢁDo not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD
may become damaged.)
DO NOT
ꢁDo not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
temperature changes.
ꢁPlace in an area where condensation does
not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon
where moisture forms on a cold surface
when there is an extreme change in
temperature. Condensation may cause
internal damage to the unit.
This unit
VCR
■ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx. 2
minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for
a short time.)
ꢁConditions where condensation may occur
–When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or
when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly
impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is
subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of
the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.
–When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
–During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
■ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
Do not place the unit on
DO NOT
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
ꢁNever use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
ꢁBefore using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
The heat can damage the unit.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the Lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Note
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is
empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
Lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
ꢁThis lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.
RQT9487
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card)
Inserting discs
Disc and card care
1 Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
;
■ How to hold a disc or card
Cartridge disc
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
Insert label-up.
Insert label-up with the arrow
facing in.
DO
DO NOT
■ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Insert fully.
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
2 Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
;
DO
DO NOT
Automatic drive select function
ꢁIf the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
ꢁIf you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
■ Handling precautions
ꢁDo not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and unbalanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
ꢁWrite on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
ꢁDo not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
ꢁDo not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
ꢁDo not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
ꢁDo not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
ꢁDo not use the following discs:
–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
Note
ꢁRemove the 8 cm disc from the cartridge and place it on the tray.
Refer to the instructions on how to remove the disc from the
cartridge.
RAM
ꢁ
It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
of a double sided disc to the other.You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
Inserting, removing the USB memory
Inserting the USB memory
When the USB indicator (“USB”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the
USB memory is being read from. Do not turn off the unit or remove
the USB memory. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of
the USB memory’s contents.
ꢁBefore inserting any USB memory to this
unit, ensure that the data stored therein
has been backed up.
ꢁCheck the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
ꢁInsert a USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB device” screen is
displayed. Select an item and press [OK]
to switch to the USB-related operations
(➡ 40, 56, 57, 58, 62, 65, 70).
–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
–Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart
shapes.
DO NOT
ꢁDo not place in the following areas:
–In direct sunlight.
–In very dusty or humid areas.
–Near a heater.
–Locations susceptible to significant
difference in temperature (condensation can occur).
–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
ꢁTo protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
when you are not using them.
Removing the USB memory
ꢁComplete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
ꢁIf a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
Inserting, removing the SD card
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the
card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or
remove the card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of
the card’s contents.
ꢁInserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
Inserting the card
Press on the centre of the
If you are using a
e.g.,
card until it clicks into
miniSD card or a
miniSD
place.
microSD card, insert
it into the adaptor
that comes with the
ADAPTER
card.
Insert and remove
this adaptor from the
unit.
Insert the card label up with
the cut-off corner on the right.
Removing the card
1 Press on the centre of the card.
2 Pull it straight out.
Automatic drive select function
ꢁIf you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card”
screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to switch to the
SD drive (➡ 39, 56, 57, 58, 62).
ꢁIf you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.
RQT9487
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 1 Connection
ꢁBefore connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
ꢁRefer to “Additional connections” (➡ 95) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off.
[approx. 0.7 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)]
Connecting a television
To the aerial
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
V
R
L
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Aerial cable
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
AC mains lead
Other connections
17, 95)
(included)
(
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
3
4
2
1
Audio/video cable
(included)
Cooling fan
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
RF OUT
RF IN
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
RQT9487
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can enjoy high-quality picture by changing the connection between this unit and your TV.
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted.You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
ꢁThis unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM) technology (➡ 114, 115).
ꢁVideo sources converted to 1920 × 1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
ꢁPlease use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
ꢁWhen outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be
possible. [➡ 74, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]
ꢁNon-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
ꢁIt is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Television’s rear
panel
HDMI IN
Required setting
ꢁSet “HDMI Video Mode” and “HDMI Audio Output”
to “On” (➡ 89).
(The default setting is “On”.)
HDMI cable
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
HDMI AV OUT
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
Note
ꢁIf you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 114)
and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
ꢁYou cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
RQT9487
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
ꢂ1 “Unit’s Display” is fixed to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.
(➡ 88)
ꢂ2 “Unit’s Display” is changed to “Bright” in the Setup menu.
TV
ꢂ3 It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
2
VOL
DRIVE
CH
SELECT
AV
–Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal,
it may take time to display the screen.
PAGE
CH
abc
def
2
3
1
After Power Save setting is complete, TV Aspect setting
screen appears.
ghi
jkl
mno
4
5
6
p
w
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
7
4 Press [ , ] to select the TV Aspect
e r
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
DEL
0
SELECT
and press [OK].
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
TV Aspect
STOP
PAUSE
16:9 WIDE TV
16:9
4:3 TV
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STATUS
Pan & Scan
I
Letterbox
OK
OK
RETURN
OPTION
RETURN
3, 4
ꢁ16:9:
RETURN
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
ꢁPan&Scan:
CREATE
CHAPTER
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture. The
“Pan&Scan” setting may not work and the
pictures may be shown in the letterbox style
depending on the content.
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
TEXT
STTL
AUDIO DISPLAY
ꢁLetterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(➡ 114).
When television picture appears, set up is complete.
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
2 Press [ ] to turn the unit on.
^
■ To confirm that stations have been tuned
When the Download from TV screen appears (➡ right)
correctly (➡ 83, DVB Channel List)
Auto Tuning setting screen appears.
ꢁAuto Tuning starts.
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital channels. TV
channels will be located and stored ready for use.
This takes 3 minutes.
■ To restart set up (➡ 84, Auto Tuning)
■ Download from TV
If this unit is connected to a Panasonic TV (VIERA) supporting
HDAVI Control 3 or later via an HDMI cable, then the setting
information on the TV is acquired by this unit when the unit is
turned on for the first time. Please proceed to the following steps.
Auto Tuning-Digital (DVB)
Scan
21
69
This will take about 3 minutes.
CH
1
2
Channel Name
TV ONE
TV 2
Type
DVB
DVB
Quality
10
10
Download fromTV
Free TV: 2 Pay TV: 0
RETURN
Radio: 0
Data: 0
Searching
Download in progress. Please wait.
RETURN : to cancel
Auto Tuning is complete when Power Save setting screen
appears.
The time information can be obtained.
RETURN
After Download from TV is complete, Power Save setting
screen appears.
3 Press [ , ] to select “On” or “Off”
e r
and press [OK].
Press [
,
e r
] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
Power Save
Power Save
On
Off
On
Off
On: Minimises standby power consumption,
disables Quick Start function. Unit’s Display
is set to “Automatic”.
On: Minimises standby power consumption,
disables Quick Start function. Unit’s Display
is set to “Automatic”.
Off: Enables Quick Start function.
Off: Enables Quick Start function.
OK
OK
RETURN
RETURN
ꢁOn:
When television picture appears, set up is complete.
It will go into the Power Save mode when the power is
turned off.
ꢁOff:
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
It is possible to start quickly from standby mode.
The features of the power save function when the unit is in
standby mode are as follows.
Note
ꢁAcquisition of the setting information is not supported by all
Panasonic TVs (VIERA).
ꢁThe acquisition may take some time depending on the VIERA
setting information.
Power Save
Power consumption
Start up time
Onꢂ1
Approx. 0.7 W
Not Quick
Offꢂ2
Approx. 10 W
Quickꢂ3
RQT9487
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Watching digital broadcasts
■ Select the programme to view using the TV
Guide
TV
1 Press [GUIDE].
^
VOL
def
DRIVE
CH
SELECT
AV
FRI 27.03.2009 21:40
All DVB Channels
TV Guide
FRI 27.03
21:30-22:30 How To Look Good Naked
All Types
Landscape
PAGE
CH
Time: 21:30
22:00
22:30
23:00
23:30
1
2
5
6
7
TV ONE
TV2
Maori Tel
TVNZ 6
TVNZ 7
How To Look Good Naked ONE News
American Idol
T
abc
2
3
1
Supernatural
1 2 CH
.CUVꢀ'FGPU
Te Mika Show
News: Te Ka Maori Televis
Numbered
buttons
ghi
jkl
mno
4
5
6
Shark In The Park
The
0<ꢀ8KGYUꢁꢀ(Cꢀ68
p
w
20 TVNZ SPO 680<ꢀ5RQTVꢀ'ZVTCꢁꢀ4GUWOGUꢀ6QOQTTQYꢀ#VꢀꢂRO
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
7
22 Partiamen
2CTNKCOGPVꢀ68
info
GUIDE Portrait/Landscape
+24 hours Prog. Type
Select Channel
OK
Page Up
OPTION
CH
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
Page Down
Select Programme
RETURN
DEL
0
SELECT
Favourites
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Operations in the TV Guide system (➡ 35)
INPUT
SELECT
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
2 Press [ ,
,
,
] to select the programme to
e r w q
view and press [OK].
STATUS
EXIT
GUIDE
STATUS
I
News
View
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
OK
e, r, w, q
OPTION
OK
RETURN
RETURN
OPTION
CREATE
CHAPTER
y This is displayed only when the programme currently
broadcasting is selected.
Colour
buttons
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
STTL
AUDIO
3 Press [ , ] to select “View” and press [OK].
e r
TEXT
STTL
AUDIO DISPLAY
TEXT
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
This unit has the tuner which allows it to directly receive and record
digital terrestrial channels.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Important
This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.
Switching audio of the TV broadcast
Select the channel
Press [AUDIO].
y Audio will switch according to the contents of the programme
every time it is pressed.
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
e.g.,
HDD
30:03 DR
001 TV ONE
HDD
HDD
30:03 DR
30:03 DR
001 TV ONE
001 TV ONE
2 Press [ ] to turn the unit on.
^
STEREO LR
(eng) HE-AAC
STEREO L
(eng) HE-AAC
STEREO R
(eng) HE-AAC
3 Press [INPUT SELECT] a few times
and select “TV”.
Input Selection
AV1
AV2
DV
HDD
30:03 DR
002 ABC TV
HDD
30:03 DR
002 ABC TV
HDD
30:03 DR
002 ABC TV
STEREO R
eng
(Dolby Digital)
STEREO L
eng
(Dolby Digital)
STEREO LR
eng
(Dolby Digital)
TV
Select
Change
You can also switch audio with the following steps.
RETURN
1 Press [OPTION].
y It will switch when the display disappears.
(It will switch faster by pressing [OK].)
2 Press [
,
] to select “Audio Selection” and press [OK].
] to select audio.
e r
3 Press [
,
w q
Note
4 Press [
CH] to select the channel.
1 2
You can not change the audio channel (LR) in following cases.
y When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 85)
y When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 87)
Everytime you change the station, digital channel information
appears automatically.
The length of time the digital channel information is displayed
can be changed. (➡ 88, On-Screen Messages)
To show subtitle
When “ ” appears in digital channel information (➡ 20)
unit’s display;
Press [STTL ].
y Press again to hide the subtitle.
y You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Note
y This unit may be able to receive free cable television but it cannot
receive paid services.
RQT9487
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Watching digital broadcasts
To store frequently viewed page (List mode only)
During the page is displayed
1 Press the colour button of the colour to store.
2 Press and hold [OK].
To select subtitle language
1 Press [OPTION].
e.g.,
FUNCTION MENU
Aspect
P100
Play Menu
Broadcast
Audio Selection
Subtitle Language
Drive Select
OK
101
200
400
888
RETURN
2 Press [ , ] to select “Subtitle
e r
The number changes to white.
Language” and press [OK].
To change stored pages (List mode only)
1 Press the colour button of the colour to change.
2 Enter the new page number with the numbered buttons.
3 Press and hold [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select language for the
w q
subtitle.
ꢁThis is not selectable if there are no subtitles or there is only
1 subtitle.
ꢁPress [EXIT] to exit.
To exit the teletext screen
Press [TEXT
].
Note
To show Teletext
The teletext function depends on respective stations.
You can enjoy teletext broadcasting, including news, weather
forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the
broadcasters.
Digital channel information
While stopped
When “ ” appears in digital channel information (➡ right)
Press [STATUS ].
1 Press [TEXT ].
1
2
3
Sub page number
e.g.,
All DVB Channels
10:30
1 TV ONE
Coronation street
9:00 - 11:00
Select Favourites
Software update
4
5
<<01 02 03 04 05 06 07
>>
Now
Current
page
P100
Rating:PG
number
TELETEXT
INFORMATION
6
1 Channel and Station Name
7
8
9
2 Programme name and Broadcast time
3 Current favourite list
4 Change the favourite list
5 Software update (➡ 94)
6 The parental ratings level
7 Subtitle (➡ 19, left)
Colour bar
8 Teletext (➡ left)
9 Multiple audio
2 Press [ , ], the numbered buttons, or
e r
the colour buttons to select the page.
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Follow the instruction on the screen to select the page.
Press [
,
w q
].
To show the sub page
(only when there are sub pages)
To show detailed information about the programme
Press [STATUS ] again.
Press [
,
w q
].
■ Change the Teletext mode
To hide the information screen
Press [STATUS ] once or twice.
“Teletext” in the Setup menu can be changed to following modes.
(➡ 88)
ꢁTOP mode (only when here is TOP text)
TOP is a particular improvement of the standard teletext
service that results in an easier search and effective guide.
–Fast overview of the teletext information available
–Easy to use step-by-step selection of the topical subject
–Page status information at the bottom of the screen
ꢁList mode
Four differently coloured page numbers are situated at the
bottom of the screen. Each of these numbers can be altered
and stored in this unit.
Note
You can also select the other channel when the information screen
is displayed by pressing [
,
e r
] and [OK].
■ If new channel message appears
(➡ 84, New Channel Message)
RQT9487
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DVD-Video/Playing recorded video contents
Refer to “Advanced playback” (➡ 36) for detailed
Playing recorded video contents
information.
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)
You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them.You
can also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles. (➡ 38)
TV
AV
VOL
def
DRIVE
CH
The following screen is displayed when recordable disc is
inserted.
SELECT
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
e.g.,
abc
2
3
1
DVD-RAM
Numbered
buttons
ghi
jkl
mno
4
5
6
Play
p
w
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
7
Copy
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
DEL
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
DVD-RAM is inserted.
u, i
OK
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
RETURN
STATUS
Press [
,
] to select “Play” and press [OK].
It will go to step 3 (➡ below).
e r
I
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
OK
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
e, r, w, q
OK
OPTION
“Red”
HDD or DVD drive.
OPTION
REC
RETURN
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
CREATE
CHAPTER
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
HDD RAM
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
Preparation
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Grouped Titles
ꢁTurn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
Time Remaining 30:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE
MUSIC
Titles
Date Channel Time
Title Name
25.05
01.01 TV ONE
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
ꢁTurn on this unit.
01.01 TV2
1:13
1
Rec time
1:00(DR)
Playing DVD-Video
Not viewed
Page 01/01
1 Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
;
Select
PICTURE
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
MUSIC
Play
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
3 Press [ , ] to select the title and
e r
ꢁPress the button again to close the tray.
ꢁPlay starts from the point specified by the disc.
press [OK].
2
When a menu screen appears on the television
To show other pages
Press [
,
u i
].
Press [ , , , ] to select the item
e r w q
Regarding DIRECT NAVIGATOR (➡ 38)
and press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
ꢄ
ꢀ
ꢃ
ꢁ
ꢂ
ꢁSome items can also be selected using the numbered
buttons.
ꢁIf you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the
menu screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].
To display Top Menu
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [ ] to select “Top Menu” and press [OK].
,
e r
ꢁYou can also press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to return to the menu
screen.
RQT9487
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD
Recording television programmes
Refer to “Important notes for recording” (➡ 26)
and “Advanced recording” (➡ 28) for detailed
information.
5
To stop recording
Press [ ].
g
If the following screen appears
Stop Recording
TV
Recording [ TV ONE 001 ]
VOL
DRIVE
CH
Recording of the above channel is in progress.
To stop recording, select "Yes" or press STOP.
Stop this recording ?
SELECT
AV
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
Yes
No
abc
def
2
3
1
CH
1 2
Numbered
buttons
OK
ghi
jkl
mno
4
5
6
RETURN
p
w
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
7
Press [
,
w q
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
DEL
0
SELECT
INPUT SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
■ To pause recording
h
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
Press [ ].
h
g
Press again to restart recording.
STATUS
You can also press [ REC] to restart.
*
I
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
w, q, OK
■ To record 2 programmes simultaneously (➡ 29)
OK
When recording digital broadcast with subtitles or
multiple audio
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
All subtitles and multiple audio are recorded. It is possible to switch
them after recording.
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
* REC
TEXT
STTL
AUDIO DISPLAY
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode.
During recording
Press [ REC] on the main unit to select the recording
*
Preparation
time.
y Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
y You can specify up to 4 hours later.
y The unit display changes as shown below.
y Turn on this unit.
OFF0:30
OFF1:00
OFF1:30
OFF4:00
OFF2:00
OFF3:00
Counter (cancel)
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
y This does not work during timer recordings (➡ 23, 32) or while
using Flexible Recording via AV input (➡ 55).
y The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.
HDD drive.
The HDD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
2 Press [INPUT SELECT] a few times
and select “TV”.
To cancel
Press [ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
*
3 Press [
CH] to select the channel.
1 2
appears.
To select with the numbered buttons:
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
y The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
To stop recording
Press [ ].
g
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
4 Press [ REC] to start recording.
*
unit’s display;
REC1
“REC1” or “REC2” will light.
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD. Data
will not be overwritten.
y When [ REC] is pressed while a drive other than the HDD
*
is selected, it will automatically switch to HDD and start the
recording.
RQT9487
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD
Timer recording (Manual timer recording)
y Date/Week
Refer to “Important notes for recording” (➡ 26)
and “Advanced timer recording” (➡ 32) for detailed
information.
You can select current date up to one month later minus
one day.You can select “1day” or “Weekly” by pressing the
“Green” button only when “Date/Week” is selected.
Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the DIRECT
NAVIGATOR screen (➡ 38) except when using Auto
Renewal Recording.
TV
VOL
DRIVE
CH
SELECT
y Start/Stop
Press and hold [
Stop (Finish time) in 15-minute increments.
AV
,
] to alter the Start (Start time) and
e r
PAGE
CH
abc
def
2
3
1
ghi
jkl
mno
4
7
5
6
y Drive
p
w
HDD (You cannot change the drive.)
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
DEL
0
SELECT
y Mode
Recording modes (➡ 28)
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
“XP”, “SP”, “LP”, “EP”, “FR” can be selected when “AV1” or
“AV2” is selected in “Channel” column.
It will be fixed to DR mode if anything else is selected.
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STATUS
EXIT
I
y Renew (Auto Renewal Recording) (➡ 33)
y Programme Name
Press [OK]. (➡ 72, Entering text)
e, r, w, q
OK
OK
OPTION
REC
RETURN
RETURN
4 Press [OK].
CREATE
CHAPTER
“Green”
“Red”
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon (red) is
displayed.
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
Timer icon (red)
z
This operation will only record to HDD.
Timer recording of the broadcast
Recording mode:DR
Timer recording from the external equipment connected to AV1 or AV2
Recording mode:XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
“
” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
z
standby has been activated.
Depending on the type of broadcast, there may be restrictions on
the title you are trying to record.
ode Space
y You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
Check for available space on
HDD when “!” is displayed.
OK
Preparation
y Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
y Turn on this unit.
y Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 90).
To return to the previous screen
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Timer Recording Remain HDD
Channel Name
30:30 DR
Schedule
FRI 23.01.2009 8:59
Drive/Mode
Space
New Timer Programme
■ Timer recording Using the TV Guide System
(➡ 32)
■
To release the unit from recording standby (➡ 33)
OK
RETURN
Total 0/32
Timer Off
Page Up
Page Down
DEL Delete
History List
CH
■ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 33)
2 Press [ , ] to select “New Timer
e r
■ Notes on timer recording (➡ 34)
Programme” and press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select the items and
w q
change the items with [ , ].
e r
Timer Recording Remain HDD 30:30 DR
FRI 23.01.2009 8:59
All DVB Channels
Favourites/AV
Channel Date/Week Start Stop
Drive
HDD
Mode
21
FRI 23.01
08:59
--
DR
[Prog.Name]
Programme Name
TVNZ SPORT EXTRA
Favourites/AV
1 day/Weekly
RETURN
y Channel
Select the channel to record.
You can press “Red” button (Favourites/AV) to change “AV
input”, “All DVB Channels”, “TV” or “Favourites 1”, etc.
You can perform this operation when you select the box of
“Channel”.
RQT9487
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03_Basic operations_XW350GZ_en.i23 23
2009/06/09 17:07:54
Deleting titles
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete
TV
1
While stopped
VOL
def
DRIVE
CH
SELECT
AV
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
2 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
e r
abc
2
3
1
press [OK].
ghi
jkl
mno
4
5
6
p
w
DELETE Navigator Grouped Titles
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
7
Time Remaining 30:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE
MUSIC
Titles
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
Title Name
Date Channel Time
DEL
DEL
0
SELECT
25.05
01.01 TV ONE
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
01.01 TV2
1:13
1
Rec time
u, i
1:00(DR)
h
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
Not viewed
OK
Page 01/01
STATUS
Select
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
PICTURE
MUSIC
EXIT
I
HDD RAM
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
FUNCTION
MENU
OK
HDD
Switching of the Navigator
(➡ 38)
e, r, w, q
You can confirm the titles, that you have selected using the
OPTION
REC
RETURN
OK
option menu. (➡ 42, step 3)
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
“Red”
3 Press [ , ] to select the title and
e r
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
press [ ].
h
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all items you wish to delete.
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
ꢁA title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain
before proceeding.
ꢁTitle that is currently recording cannot be deleted.
ꢁTitles on the disc cannot be deleted in the following cases:
–While recording to disc
To show other pages
Press [
,
u i
].
4 Press [OK].
–While high speed copying
5 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
w q
Preparation
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
press [OK].
RAM
ꢁ
Release protection (➡ 80, Setting the protection).
The title is deleted.
■ Available disc space after deleting
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
HDD RAM
ꢁ
The space deleted becomes available for recording.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles.
Deleting during play
Last title Available disc
recorded space
Title
Title
.....
1
While playing
Press [DEL].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
w q
-RW(V) +RW
ꢁ
Available recording space increases only when
the last recorded title is deleted.
press [OK].
The title is deleted.
Available disc space does
not increase even after
deleting.
Available disc space
increases after deleting.
Last title Available disc
Title
Title
Title
.....
recorded
space
Later recorded
titles
Last title Available disc
recorded space
Deleted
.....
This space becomes available for recording after all the later
recorded titles are deleted.
-R -R DL +R +R DL
Available space does not increase even
after the contents are deleted.
ꢁ
RQT9487
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
2 Press [
,
e r
] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Create List
Grouped Titles
HDD
Date Channel Time
Title Name
Title
TV
25.05
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
01.01 TV ONE
01.01 TV2
1:13
1
VOL
def
DRIVE
CH
Time
Rec time
12:36
SELECT
AV
0:52(SP)
PAGE
CH
abc
2
3
1
Page 01/01
Select
OK
RETURN
OPTION
ghi
jkl
mno
4
5
6
p
w
3 Press [
,
] to select the title and press [ ].
e r
h
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
7
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
DEL
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
h
u, i
ꢁThe items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
h
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STATUS
ꢁWhen copying to a disc using high speed mode, only titles
I
indicated with “
ꢁTo show other pages
Press [ ].
” can be registered.
,
u i
OK
4 Press [OK].
ꢁTo edit the copying list (➡ 51)
You cannot start copying when the value of “Size” (➡ 51)
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufficient).
5 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
e, r, w, q
OPTION
REC
RETURN
OK
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
6 Set to make it possible to play on
HDD
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
p
other equipment.
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
(“Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”)
HDD
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
only)
(
p
1 Insert a disc.
1 Press [
,
] to select “Other Setting” and press [ ].
q
e r
2 Press [OK].
3 Press [
e.g.,
,
] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
e r
DVD-RAM
ꢁIf “On” is selected
Play
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
–
After finalising, the discs
Copy
become play-only and you can also play them on other
DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or
edit.
DVD-RAM is inserted.
+RW
–
Create the Top Menu. Top Menu is a convenient
OK
function. We recommend you create the menu before
playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
RETURN
4 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy” and
e r
7 Press [ , ] to select “Start Copying”
e r
press [OK].
and press [OK].
3 Set the copy direction.
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
,
] to select “Copy Direction” and press [ ].
] to select “Source” and press [OK].
] to select “HDD” and press [OK].
e r
q
8 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
,
e r
[OK] to start copying.
,
e r
If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to
“DVD”.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising or creating Top Menu.)
4 Press [
,
] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
e r
5 Press [
,
] to select “DVD” and press [OK].
e r
6 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Copy
Cancel All
Source
HDD
■ Copying list icons and functions (➡ 51)
1 Copy Direction
HDD
DVD
Destination
DVD
2 Copy Mode
■ To check the properties of a title and sort
VIDEO High Speed
Information of the copy destination
-
-
DVD-RAM
Copy restricted titles can be
Copying list (➡ 51)
3 Create List
0
copied on to disc
Start Copying
Note
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
ꢁTitles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered
simultaneously.
ꢁTitles recorded using a different encoding system (PAL or NTSC)
from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be
copied.
4 Set the recording mode.
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
4 Press [
[OK].
,
,
] to select “Copy Mode” and press [ ].
e r
q
] to select “Format” and press [OK].
] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
] to select “Recording Mode” and press
e r
,
e r
,
e r
5 Press [
,
] to select the mode and press [OK].
e r
6 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
5 Register titles for copy.
1 Press [
,
e r
] to select “Create List” and press [ ].
q
Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343 MB
(
0% )
Size:
0 MB
Title
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
New item (Total=0)
HDD
DVD
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
3 Create List
0
RQT9487
Start Copying
Page 01/01
OK
RETURN
Create copy list.
25
OPTION
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important notes for recording
Recording to HDD
Recording to discs
Recording or timer recording is performed in DR mode using this unit’s tuner.
ꢁRecording or timer recording from external equipment is performed in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode.
RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
Recording on the discs is performed either in FR mode using “Recording via AV2 input” or in XP, SP, LP or EP
mode using “DV Automatic Recording”.
Recording to DVD-R DL
and +R DL
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
High definition quality
image
Quality of titles to be recorded differs depending on the recording mode. (➡ 28)
ꢁWhen recording in DR mode
Recorded as high definition quality.
ꢁWhen converting recording mode to HG, HX, HE, HL from DR
Recorded as high definition quality with compressed broadcast data.
ꢁWhen copying in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes
Recorded as standard definition quality.
Broadcast in multi-
channel sound
You can select the audio language when receiving audio in multi-channel broadcast [“
bottom of digital channel information display (➡ 20)].
” appears at the
ꢁWhen recording in DR mode
All multiple audio are recorded. It is possible to switch audio during the playback of the title.
ꢁWhen converting recording mode to HG, HX, HE, HL from DR/When copying in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes
Only one audio is recorded.
Before copying
–“Copy”: Select the audio with “DVB Preferred Language” in the Setup menu (➡ 84).
–“Copy Title Playing”: Select the audio with “Audio Selection” in the Disc menu (➡ 76).
Programmes with
subtitles
It is possible to display the subtitles when receiving a programme with the subtitles [“ ” appears at the bottom
of digital channel information display (➡ 20)].
ꢁWhen recording in DR mode
Subtitles will be recorded as they are. It is possible to switch the subtitles during the playback of the title.
ꢁWhen converting recording mode to HG, HX, HE, HL from DR/When copying in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes
Subtitle will not be recorded.
Surround audio
You can enjoy surround audio when receiving a programme with surround audio (➡ 28).
ꢁWhen recording in DR mode
It is recorded as is.
ꢁWhen converting recording mode to HG, HX, HE, HL from DR
It is recorded with surround audio that was converted from broadcasted audio format (➡ 87, Audio Channels for
HG/HX/HE/HL Recording).
ꢁWhen copying in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes
It is recorded with stereo audio.
16:9 image such as wide ꢁWhen “Rec for High Speed Copy” the Setup menu is “On”
broadcasting
–Record in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR mode from external equipment.
–Copy from the finalised disc (DVD-Video) to the HDD.
-R -R DL -RW(V)
ꢁWhen copying to
ꢁWhen converting the recording mode from DR mode to HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes
It will be recorded in accordance to the setting of “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 85) in the Setup menu.
ꢁIn the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”, recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
-R -R DL -RW(V)
–
When the recording mode is set to “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode
–When recording or copying to a +R and +RW/When copying to a +R DL
DR File Conversion
“DR File Conversion” is a function that converts the titles in DR mode to other recording modes.
In general, Data size of a title will be smaller than the original title after conversion.
You can save HDD capacity by deleting the original title after conversion.
Title
Available disc space
DR
Converting to other mode
Title
Available disc space
DR
Title HL
Deleting the original data
Available disc space
Title HL
RQT9487
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High Speed Copy
Speed to copy the title recorded on the HDD to a disc differs depending on the recording mode of the title and
the disc to copy.
The title in DR, HG, HX, HE, HL modes can not be copied at high speed.
Title in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes
RAM
Title can be copied at high speed.
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
Title can be copied at high speed if “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” before the programme is recorded
to HDD. (The default setting is “On”. ➡ 85)
But in the following cases, high speed mode does not work.
+R +R DL +RW
+R +R DL +RW
-R -R DL -RW(V)
–
–
–
Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode
Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
Playing the disc on
other players
The disc must be finalised. (➡ 82)
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them.You can then play them
as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.ꢂ
ꢂ
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW. (➡ 81)
Play on other DVD equipment
Record to DVD-R, etc.
C
!
!
/
I
!!
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
!!
!!
!!
!
!
/
!
!
!!
/!!
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
!!OPEN/CLOSE
H
RC
SEA
ENTER
V
O
L
LA
Y
DISP
U
MEN
OP
T
URN
RET
NU
N
ME
OFF
DC
IN
9V
Finalise
EN
OP
D
UN
RO
UR
A.S
E
EP
EA
T
R
R
MOD
I
T
O
MON
E
M
ODE
TUR
PIC
+RW
If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (➡ 82).
RQT9487
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced recording
Recording modes
This also explains about while recording and while copying. (There are discs that can only copy, depending on the disc.)
Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods and discs.
Recording mode
DR
HG, HX, HE, HL
XP, SP, LP, EP
FR
Flexible Recording Mode
Features
Record with the same
quality of the broadcast
Record high definition
programme as
Record in quality as in
conventional analogue
broadcast
Record in quality as in
conventional analogue
broadcast
Record by automatically
adjusting the quality
between XP and EP (8
hours) depending on the
remaining area on the disc
compressedꢂ1 High
Definition data
Quality that can be
recorded
Quality same as
broadcasted
(HD quality and SD quality) data (HD quality and SD
quality)
Quality produced by
conversion of broadcast
SD quality only
Multiple audio
Subtitles
Record all multiple audio
Can be recorded
Record only one audio (➡ 26)
Cannot be recorded
The audio of the
surround
programme
Surround audio as the
broadcast
Surround audio produced
by conversion of broadcast
audio formatꢂ2 (➡ 87, Audio
Channels for HG/HX/HE/
HL Recording)
Stereo audio
ꢂ1 MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 encoding
ꢂ2 If the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz, surround audio is mixed and recorded in front LR channels. Audio will be output from two front
speakers only, even if you play it on 5.1 ch speaker connection.
■ Recording method
(ꢃ:Possible, –:Impossible)
-R
-RW(V)
+R
+RW
-R DL
+R DL
HDD
RAM
Recording method
ꢃꢂ1
–
ꢃꢂ2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ꢃ
–
–
ꢃ
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ꢃ
–
–
ꢃ
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ꢃ
–
–
ꢃ
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(DR)
(HG, HX, HE, HL)
Recording
(XP, SP, LP, EP)
(FR)
–
ꢃꢂ1
–
ꢃꢂ2
ꢃꢂ2
–
(DR)
(HG, HX, HE, HL)
(XP, SP, LP, EP)
(FR)
Timer Recording
(DR)
Flexible Recording via
AV input
(HG, HX, HE, HL)
(XP, SP, LP, EP)
(FR)
–
–
ꢃ
–
(DR)
(HG, HX, HE, HL)
(XP, SP, LP, EP)
(FR)
–
Recording via AV2 input
–
–
(DR)
–
(HG, HX, HE, HL)
(XP, SP, LP, EP)
(FR)
–
DV Automatic Recording
ꢃ
–
ꢂ1 When using this unit’s tuner
ꢂ2 When recording from external equipment
■ Maximum number of titles that can be recorded
HDD
ꢁYou can record up to 499 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
ꢁYou can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
+R +R DL +RW
ꢁYou can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
RQT9487
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or recording from external equipment. The unit automatically selects a recording rate
between XP and EP (8 hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
ꢁWhen recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
■ Recording modes and approximate recording times
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
Recording Mode
HDD
(250 GB)
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
DVD-R DL
+R DL
(8.5 GB)
Single-sided
(4.7 GB)
Double-sidedꢂ2
+RW
(9.4 GB)
(4.7 GB)
DRꢂ1
37 hours 30 min.
105 hours
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(High Definition Quality:
14 Mbps)
DRꢂ1
–
(Standard Definition
Quality: 5 Mbps)
HG
HX
HE
HL
XP
SP
LP
40 hours
60 hours
90 hours
120 hours
55 hours
110 hours
221 hours
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1 hour
2 hours
4 hours
2 hours
4 hours
8 hours
1 hour
2 hours
4 hours
1 hour 45 min.
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
EPꢂ3
441 hours
8 hours
16 hours
8 hours
14 hours 20 min.
(331 hoursꢂ4)
(6 hoursꢂ4)
(12 hoursꢂ4)
(6 hoursꢂ4)
(10 hours 45 min.ꢂ4)
ꢂ1 Recording time of DR mode depends on bit rate of broadcasting.
ꢂ2 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
ꢂ3 When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
discs.
ꢂ4 When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “6 hours” in the Setup menu (➡ 85). The sound quality is better when using “6 hours” than when
using “8 hours”.
RAM
ꢁ
When recording to DVD-RAM using “8 hours” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. Use
“6 hours” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
■ Regarding recording time remaining
DR mode recording
Remaining time in the DR mode is calculated with a bit rate of approx. 14 Mbps. But the bit rate differs depending on the broadcast, so the
displayed remaining time might be different from the actual remaining time.
Other recording modes (title conversion or from external input)
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording.
2 programmes simultaneous recording
It is possible to record 2 programmes simultaneously.
Possible combination for 2 programmes simultaneous recording
To record both programmes
to the HDD
and
HDD
HDD
Digital broadcast
(DR mode)
Digital broadcast
or
external input
Note
ꢁ2 programmes simultaneous recording is not possible in following conditions:
–2 programmes from the external input
–While recording from DV input, or executing “Recording via AV2 input”
–While high speed copying
–2 programmes on same channel cannot be recorded simultaneously by pressing [ REC].
*
RQT9487
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced recording
Playing while you are recording
This operation will only record to HDD.
Chasing playback
Playback from the beginning of the title in the HDD, while the title is
being recorded to the HDD.
Simultaneous rec and play
Playback the previously recorded title while recording onto the HDD.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 30:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE
MUSIC
Titles
Date Channel Time
Title Name
25.05
01.01 TV ONE
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
01.01 TV2
1:13
1
Rec time
1:00(DR)
Not viewed
Page 01/01
Select
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
PICTURE
MUSIC
Play
“
” is displayed on the recording programme.
*
3 Press [ , ] to select a title and press
e r
[OK].
To stop play
Press [ ].
g
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To stop recording
After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the screen.
2 Press [ ].
g
ꢁIf the confirmation screen appears (➡ 22)
Note
ꢁ“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
ꢁDepending on the state of the unit, playback may not be possible.
(➡ 99)
RQT9487
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation during Recording
Check the recording
programme
Press [STATUS ].
e.g., while 2 programmes simultaneous recording
Recording programme
displayed on the TV screen
HDD
REC1
001 TV ONE
Recording programme not
displayed on the TV screen
002 TV2 REC2
Press [INPUT SELECT].
Switch the input
Press [
CH].
1 2
Switch to other channel
It is necessary to display the recording programme onto the TV screen to perform operations such as
pause.
Display the recording
programme on the TV
screen
ꢁIf the input was switched:
ꢁIf the channel was switched: Press [
Press [INPUT SELECT].
CH].
1 2
ꢁIf the drive was switched:
Press [DRIVE SELECT].
It is necessary to display the programme you want to stop on the TV screen. (➡ above)
To stop recording
Press [ ].
g
ꢁFrom the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
It is necessary to display the programme you want to pause on the TV screen. (➡ above)
To pause recording
Press [h].
ꢁPress again to restart recording.
You can also press [ REC] to restart.
*
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
ꢁIf paused while recording in DR mode, the paused part may become a still picture for a moment during
playback of that programme.
Record other programme with steps 1–4 on page 22.
ꢁOne of the 2 programmes needs to be digital broadcasting recorded with DR mode.
ꢁ“Manual recording” is also available. (➡ 54)
Perform 2 programmes
simultaneous recording
unit’s display;
REC1
“REC1” and “REC2” will light.
REC2
ꢁChannel switch / input switch while performing 2 programmes simultaneous recording will switch
between the 2 recording programmes.
RQT9487
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD
Advanced timer recording
Timer recording Using the TV Guide
System
3 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon (red) is
displayed.
Naked
0
This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode.
22:30
23:00
23:30
TV Guide system provides programme information only from the
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV
programme magazine.
aked
z
ONE News
zSupernatural
Timer icon (red)
zT
y You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
“
” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
z
standby has been activated.
Preparation
To return to the previous screen
y Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
y Turn on this unit.
y Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 90).
■ To cancel a timer recording on the TV Guide
Note
screen
y TV Guide does not work if the clock is not set correctly.
y If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (➡ 88), the TV Guide
system cannot be used.
y The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via
externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.
1 Press [
,
,
e r w q
,
] to select the programme in the TV Guide and
press [OK].
2 Press [
,
] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“ ” in the TV Guide
w q
z
disappears.)
■ To modify the timer recording on the TV Guide
screen
1 Press [
,
,
,
] to select the programme you want to modify
e r w q
1 Press [GUIDE].
in the TV Guide and press [OPTION].
FRI 27.03.2009 21:40
All DVB Channels
TV Guide
FRI 27.03
21:30-22:30 How To Look Good Naked
All Types
Landscape
Menu
Time: 21:30
22:00
22:30
23:00
23:30
View
1
2
5
6
7
TV ONE
TV2
Maori Tel
TVNZ 6
TVNZ 7
How To Look Good Naked ONE News
T
American Idol
Supernatural
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
.CUVꢀ'FGPU
Te Mika Show
News: Te Ka Maori Televis
Shark In The Park
The
0<ꢀ8KGYUꢁꢀ(Cꢀ68
20 TVNZ SPO 680<ꢀ5RQTVꢀ'ZVTCꢁꢀ4GUWOGUꢀ6QOQTTQYꢀ#VꢀꢂRO
22 Partiamen
2CTNKCOGPVꢀ68
info
GUIDE Portrait/Landscape
+24 hours Prog. Type
Select Channel
OK
Page Up
OPTION
CH
Page Down
Select Programme
RETURN
2 Press [
,
] to select “Timer Rec Edit” and press [OK].
Favourites
e r
(➡ 23, step 3)
2 Press [ , , , ] to select the future
e r w q
■ When the TV Guide displays the empty TV Guide
programme and press [OK].
list
y Following screen is displayed when the programme
currently broadcasting is selected.
FRI 27.03.2009 21:42
All DVB Channels
TV Guide
FRI 27.03
All Types
Landscape
Time: 21:30
22:00
22:30
23:00
23:30
News
1
2
5
TV ONE
TV2
Maori Tel
The “empty” field
American Idol
Supernatural
View
.CUVꢀ'FGPU
Te Mika Show
News: Te Ka Maori Televis
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
y Some digital broadcast may not send programme information. Set
the timer recording manually (➡ 23).
■
To release the unit from recording standby (➡ 33)
Press [
,
e r
] to select “Timer Rec Set” and press [OK].
■ To cancel recording when recording has already
Timer Recording Remain HDD 75:15 DR
FRI 27.03.2009 21:40
begun (➡ 33)
Channel Date/Week Start
Stop
Drive
HDD
Mode
1
FRI 27.03 21:30 22:30
DR
■ Notes on timer recording (➡ 34)
[Prog.Name]
Programme Name
How To Look Good Naked
TV ONE
Genre: Entertainment
Rating: MA 15+
Gok Wan meets 33-year-old wannabe actress Clare Coxon whose low body confidence
is holding her back from pousuing her dream of appearing on stage.
OK
Favourites/AV
1 day/Weekly
RETURN
y Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[
,
e r w q
,
,
] (➡ 23, step 3).
RQT9487
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the unit from recording
standby
To cancel recording when recording
has already begun
Press [INPUT SELECT] or [1 2 CH] to display the programme that
you want to stop recording on the TV screen while 2 programmes
are simultaneously recording.
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
1 Press [ ].
g
2 Press [ , ] to select the programme
e r
e.g.,
and press the “Red” button.
Stop Recording
ꢁThe timer icon “ ” (➡ 34) will change from red to grey.
z
Recording [ TV ONE 001 ]
ꢁYou cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
Timer recording of this programme in progress.
Stop this timer recording?
even one timer icon “ ” (red) remains in the timer recording
z
list.
ꢁPress the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
Yes
No
standby. (The timer icon “ ” will change to red.)
z
OK
RETURN
Auto Renewal Recording
If you record a programme repeatedly everyday or every week using
timer recording, the unit will record the new programme over the old
one.
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected. (➡ 23)
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
[OK].
ꢁIf you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled.
However, if you have already set the weekly or daily timer
recording, the recording will start at the next scheduled
time.
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [ , ] to select the programme
e r
and press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Renew”
w q
column.
4 Press [ , ] to select “ON” and press
e r
[OK].
Note
ꢁIf a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while playback is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
ꢁWhen there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
RQT9487
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD
Advanced timer recording
Check, change or delete a programme
Notes on timer recording
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
y Timer recording will not be performed if the clock is not set.
y If “TV System” (➡ 88) in the Setup menu was modified to playback
a disc or a title while on timer recording standby, return the setting
to original before the recording is started.
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Timer Recording Remain HDD
y Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
y Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
y Timer recordings do not begin while copying in normal speed
mode.
y The timer recording starts, whether the unit is turned on or off. If
the recording starts with the unit turned on, you can turn the unit
off without affecting the recording status. This unit’s on/off status
during the timer recording will not change after the timer recording
finishes.
75:15 DR
FRI 27.03.2009 21:41
Channel Name
TVNZ 6
The sitting
Schedule Drive/Mode
Space
FRI 27.03
HDD
DR
OK
z
z
z
22:20 - 22:30
TV ONE
FRI 27.03
HDD
DR
!
ONE News Tonight
22:30 - 23:00
TV2
Supernatural
FRI
22:30 - 23:25
HDD
DR
-->
24.04
HDD
DR
TV ONE
How To Look Good Naked
FRI 27.03
21:30 - 23:30
New Timer Programme
OK
RETURN
Total 4/32
Timer Off
Page Up
Page Down
DEL Delete
History List
CH
y When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, last 1 minute of earlier
programme will not be recorded unless it can perform 2
programmes simultaneous recording.
Icons
z
Red: Timer recording standby is activated.
Grey: Timer recording standby is not activated.
This programme is currently recording.
Part or all of the programme will not be recorded since
the programme is overlapping.
The HDD was full so the programme failed to record.
The programme was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.
The programme did not complete recording because of
some reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
(➡ 33).
Programme
Programme
*
Not recorded
Recorded
Recorded
y If timer recordings overlap around the same time, some
programmes will not be recorded depending on the set timer
recordings. As for programmes with “
” displayed on the timer
recording list screen, some portion or all of the programmes
cannot be recorded. Press [PROG/CHECK] to confirm. (➡ left)
Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation
(➡ 99)
OK:
Displayed if the recording can fit in the remaining
space.
For recordings made daily or weekly, the display
will show until when recordings can be made (up
to a maximum of one month from the present
time) based on the time remaining on the HDD.
It may not be possible to record because:
y there is not enough space left.
J (Date):
! :
y the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum. (➡ 28)
■ To change a programme
e r
Press [
step 3)
,
] to select the programme and press [OK]. (➡ 23,
■ To delete a programme
e r
Press [
,
] to select the programme and press [DEL].
■ To confirm the History List
1
2
Press the “Green” button.
Press [
,
] to select the programme and press [OK].
e r
y Reason why the timer recording failed or similar can be
confirmed. Press [OK] again to exit.
y Press the “Green” button to return to the previous screen.
■ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Note
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
RQT9487
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04_Recording_XW350GZ_en.indd 34
2009/06/09 16:55:06
Selecting the programme from the desired
programme type or Favourites
Operations in the TV Guide system
This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by programme
type (e.g. Movies, Sport) or Favourites.
Basic operations
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and Portrait
view.
1
From the desired programme type
Landscape view
Press the “Yellow” button to display
FRI 27.03.2009 21:42
All DVB Channels
TV Guide
FRI 27.03
21:30-22:30 How To Look Good Naked
the list of programme type.
From the desired favourites
All Types
Landscape
Time: 21:30
22:00
22:30
23:00
23:30
1
2
5
6
7
TV ONE
TV2
Maori Tel
TVNZ 6
TVNZ 7
How To Look Good Naked ONE News
T
American Idol
Supernatural
Press the “Blue” button to display the
list of Favourites.
.CUVꢀ'FGPU
Te Mika Show
News: Te Ka Maori Televis
Shark In The Park
The
0<ꢀ8KGYUꢁꢀ(Cꢀ68
20 TVNZ SPO 680<ꢀ5RQTVꢀ'ZVTCꢁꢀ4GUWOGUꢀ6QOQTTQYꢀ#VꢀꢂRO
22 Partiamen
2CTNKCOGPVꢀ68
info
GUIDE Portrait/Landscape
+24 hours Prog. Type
Select Channel
OK
Page Up
OPTION
2 Press [ , ] to select the desired
e r
CH
Page Down
Select Programme
RETURN
Favourites
item.
Prog.type
All Types
Favourites
All DVB Channels
All DVB Channels
Free Channels
Pay Channels
TV
All Types
Movies
News
Entertainment
Sport
Children’s
Portrait view
FRI 27.03.2009 21:42
All DVB Channels
TV Guide
FRI 27.03
1 TV ONE 2 TV2
21:30-22:30 How To Look Good Naked
Portrait
All Types
Radio
5 Maori Tel 6 TVNZ 6
7 TVNZ 7
Music
22:30-23:00 One News Tonight
Arts/Culture
Current Affairs
Education/Information
Select Programme
info
OPTION
OK
Select Channel
RETURN
GUIDE
Portrait/Landscape
+24 hours
Prog. Type
Favourites
3 Press [OK].
ꢁA list appears with all programmes of the selected item.
To change channels Landscape view
Press [ ] to select a channel.
ꢁWhen you select the Landscape view, the unit displays
programmes in grey that do not belong to the selected
programme type.
,
e r
Portrait view
Press [ ] to select a channel.
,
w q
e.g.,
Programme type,
“News” is
selected in step 2
of Landscape
view.
FRI 27.03.2009 21:44
All DVB Channels
TV Guide
FRI 27.03
21:30-22:30 How To Look Good Naked
The TV Guide list appears for this channel.
News
Landscape
To view a
programme list for
another day
ꢁJump ahead 24 hours
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
ꢁJump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
You can only jump back to the current
date. Past information cannot be viewed.
Time: 21:30
22:00
22:30
23:00
23:30
1
2
5
6
7
TV ONE
TV2
Maori Tel
TVNZ 6
TVNZ 7
How To Look Good Naked ONE News
American Idol
T
Supernatural
.CUVꢀ'FGPU
Te Mika Show
News: Te Ka Maori Televis
Shark In The Park
The
0<ꢀ8KGYUꢁꢀ(Cꢀ68
20 TVNZ SPO 680<ꢀ5RQTVꢀ'ZVTCꢁꢀ4GUWOGUꢀ6QOQTTQYꢀ#VꢀꢂRO
22 Partiamen
2CTNKCOGPVꢀ68
info
GUIDE Portrait/Landscape
+24 hours Prog. Type
Select Channel
OK
Page Up
OPTION
CH
Page Down
Select Programme
RETURN
Favourites
When jumping, the selected time period
may deviate.
Note
The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.
This function does not work properly unless the information which
distinguishes the programme type and profiles sent from broadcast
stations is correct.
To browse through
the TV Guide list
To see programme
information
(Programmes with the
symbol)
Press [
CH].
1 2
Press [STATUS ].
Additional information (programme name,
programme duration, broadcast time,
description) is available for these
programmes.
4 Press [ , , , ] to select the
e r w q
programme.
Press [
,
] to scroll up and down.
e r
To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have
selected the programme type or favourites
Select “All Types” of the programme type or “All DVB Channels” of
the favourites in step 2 above.
To show other pages
Press [CH ] (Previous) or [ CH] (Next).
1
2
Press [STATUS ] again to return to the
programme list.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
TV Guide data download
ꢁDownload automatically while the unit is turned on.
If the unit is turned off at 3:00 AM, the TV Guide data is
downloaded automatically.
ꢁDepending on the state of the unit, data is not downloaded during
2 programmes simultaneous recording and the like.
RQT9487
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced playback
ꢁRefer to page 40 for playing DivX.
ꢁRefer to page 58 for playing still pictures.
ꢁRefer to page 65 for playing music.
Note
ꢁWhen playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (➡ 88).
ꢁA disc or title with different “TV System” (➡ 88) may not be able to playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording.You will be
able to playback by changing the “TV System” settings in that case, but to prevent failure of the timer recording, change back the settings
before the recording starts.
ꢁDepending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.
ꢁThe producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
ꢁDiscs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [ ] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television
g
screen and so on.
Operation during play
ꢁDepending on the media, some operations may not be possible.
Press [ ].
g
Stop
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [ ] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
q
Stopped position
HDD
ꢁ
:
Stopped position for each title is memorized.
ꢁDiscs: Only previous stopped position is memorized.
The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
AVCHD
ꢁ
(SD card), DivX : Only previous stopped position is memorized except DivX on the USB
memory.
The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Press [ ].
h
Pause
Press [ ] again or [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
h
q
Press [
] or [
].
t
y
Search
+R +R DL +RW
ꢁThe speed increases up to 5 steps. (
up to 3 steps)
ꢁPress [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
q
ꢁAudio is heard during first level search forward.
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels search.
During play or while paused, press [
] or [
].
u
i
Skip
Skip to the title or chapter you want to play.
ꢁIt will skip to the beginning of chapters (➡ 45) if the title contains chapters.
HDD
ꢁ
It will not skip the title. But the title in the grouped titles during “Grouped Playback” (➡ 38) will be
skipped.
ꢁDivX : Press [
] to return to the beginning of the title currently playing.
u
Press the numbered buttons.
Starting from a selected
Play starts from the selected title or chapter.
title
AVCHD
ꢁ
DVD-V AVCHD
Input a 3-digit number.
e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
DVD-V
ꢁ
Input a 2-digit number.
e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
ꢁWhile stopped (the screen on the right is displayed on the television), the title
is designated. While playing, the chapter is designated.
Press and hold [ ] (PLAY/×1.3).
q
Quick View
Play speed is quicker than normal.
Except
ꢁPress again to return to normal speed.
ꢁImage may not be played back smoothly in case of DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode titles or
-RW(V)
(It will not work even if it is
AVCHD
.
finalised)
-RW(VR)
, DivX
While paused, press [
] or [
].
t
y
Slow-motion
Except DivX
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
ꢁPress [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
q
AVCHD
ꢁ
Forward direction [
] only.
y
ꢁThe unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes
DVD-V AVCHD
(excluding
).
While paused, press [ ] (
) or [ ] (
q
).
h q
w
w h
Frame-by-frame
Except DivX
Each press shows the next frame.
ꢁPress and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
ꢁPress [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
q
AVCHD
ꢁ
Forward direction [ ] (
q
) only.
h q
RQT9487
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
Skipping the specified
2 Press [ , ] to select the time and press [OK].
e r
time (Time Slip)
Play skips the specified time.
ꢁEach time you press [ ], the time increases [ ] or decreases [ ] by 1 minute intervals. (Press
and hold for 10-minute intervals.)
DVD-V AVCHD
Except
, DivX
,
e r
e
r
This automatically disappears after approximately 5 seconds. To show
the screen again, press [TIME SLIP] again.
-5 min.
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
Each time you press, play restarts approximately 1 minute later.
Manual Skip
Except DivX
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen. (➡ 78)
Aspect
Chapters are divided at the point pressed. (➡ 45)
Create Chapter
HDD RAM
Changing audio during play
Display the subtitle during play
HDD RAM -RW(VR) DVD-V AVCHD
HDD
DivX
It is possible to display the subtitles during the playback if the
programme with subtitle is recorded with DR mode.
Press [AUDIO].
It will switch depending on the contents recorded every time it is
pressed.
Press [STTL ].
ꢁIt will switch between On/Off every time it is pressed.
HDD
e.g.,
“Audio LR, eng” is selected.
DVD-V AVCHD
DivX
HDD
Display with “Subtitles” in the Disc menu (➡ 76, Subtitles).
PLAY
Audio LR
eng
DVD-V AVCHD
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (➡ 76, Soundtrack).
1 ENG
Digital 3/2.1ch
Soundtrack
e.g., English is selected.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL
(Double Layer, single-sided)
When switching layers:
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-
sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is not enough
space on the first layer to record a programme, the remainder is recorded
on the second layer. When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit
automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way
as a normal programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut
out when the unit is switching layers.
Video and audio may momentarily cut
Second recordable layer
The available
space
First recordable layer
Title 2
Title 1
(Outer section
of the disc)
(Inner
section of
the disc)
Playback direction
DVD-R DL
+R DL
RQT9487
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
Playback the title that was viewed
once
You can choose to start the playback from the point you have last
stopped, or from the beginning when the resume play function
(➡ 36) is operating.
HDD
*
Currently recording.
Title protected.
Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection
1 Press [OPTION].
×
Title cannot be played
2 Press [
w q
press [OK].
,
] to select “Play” and press [OK].
e r
(When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.)
3 Press [
,
] to select “Last Played” or “Beginning” and
HDD
Groups of titles (
only)
Title that was recorded but has not yet been played
To sort the titles for easy searching
HDD
(
only)
HDD
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Title recorded using a different encoding system from
that of the TV system currently selected on the unit.
ꢁAlter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(➡ 88).
All Titles screen only
This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback
from many titles.
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [
,
] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
] to select the item and press [OK].
e r
,
HDD
Switching of the Navigator
3 Press [
e r
ꢁIf you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the sort will be
cancelled.
It is possible to switch the screen display with the following
operation even in the DELETE Navigator screens.
1 Press [OPTION].
HDD
To play grouped titles
Grouped Titles screen only
2 Press [
,
e r
] to select the item and press [OK].
e.g.,
■ Play the selected titles
e r
Release Grouping
All Titles
1 Press [
,
] to select the group and press [OK].
] to select the title and press [OK].
“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles”
2 Press [
,
e r
PICTURE / MUSIC
■ Play the titles continuously (Grouped Playback)
While the Grouped Titles screen is displayed,
Grouped Titles screen
Two or more titles recorded in the daily/weekly timer recording
mode are bundled and displayed as one item.
Press [
,
e r
] to select the group and press [ ] (PLAY).
q
HDD
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
To edit the group of titles
Time Remaining 30:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE
MUSIC
Titles
Date Channel Time
Title Name
Grouped Titles screen only
25.05
01.01 TV ONE
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
1 Press [
,
] to select a title or a group and press [ ].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
e r
h
01.01 TV2
1:13
1
Rec time
1:00(DR)
Not viewed
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
Page 01/01
2 Press [OPTION].
Select
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
Create Group
RETURN
PICTURE
MUSIC
Play
3 Press [
,
e r
] to select the option and press
Release Grouping
[OK].
Select the item marked with
bundled titles.
and press [OK] to display the
Create Group:
Press [ ] to select “Create” and press [OK].
All Titles screen
Displays all titles.
,
w q
ꢁSelected titles are bundled to form a group.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Titles
Release Grouping:
Time Remaining
30:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE MUSIC
Title Name
No. Date Day Channel Time
001
002 25.05 SAT
Press [
,
] to select “Release” and press [OK].
w q
12:36 Born And Bred:
25.05 SAT
A
Wrathful
Play School: Food Friday
12:37
ꢁAll the titles in the group are released.
TV ONE
01.01 SUN
1:35
003
01.01 SUN TV2
1:13
004
Rec time
1:00(DR)
Remove:
Not viewed
(Only when titles in a group have been selected)
Press [
,
] to select “Remove” and press [OK].
w q
Page 01/01
Select
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
ꢁSelected titles are removed from the group.
RETURN
PICTURE
MUSIC
■ Regarding the group name
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 30:54 DR
Date Channel Time
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 30:54 DR VIDEO
VIDEO
HDD
MUSIC
Title Name
12:36 Born And Bred: A Wrathful Go
PICTURE
MUSIC
Titles
PICTURE
Date Channel Time
Title Name
25.05
01.01 TV ONE
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
25.05
25.05
12:36
1:35
12:37 Play School: Food Friday
01.01 TV2
1:13
1
Rec time
ec time
1:00(DR)
1:00(DR)
Not viewed
OK
Not viewed
Page 01/01
Page 01/01
Select
OPTION
Select
OPTION
VIDEO
OK
RETURN
RETURN
PICTURE
MUSIC
Play
To change the group name
1
2
3
4
Press [
Press [
Press [
,
] to select the group and press [OPTION].
] to select “Edit” and press [OK].
] to select “Enter Title Name” and press [OK].
e r
,
e r
,
e r
Enter the name. (➡72, Entering text)
ꢁEven if the group name is changed, the title names in the group
will not be changed.
Note
ꢁThis function is only available for videos and not available for
music and still pictures.
RQT9487
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback of the High Definition Video (AVCHD)
AVCHD
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
It is possible to playback the high definition video (AVCHD) recorded
on the Panasonic’s video camera, etc. on the disc or SD card.
To display the top menu
1 Insert a disc or SD card.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Play Video
e r
When the top menu or “DIRECT NAVIGATOR” is not displayed
Refer to “Starting from a selected title” (➡ 36) to playback.
(AVCHD)” and press [OK].
Operation during play (➡ 36)
RAM
e.g.,
Note
DVD-RAM ( AVCHD )
ꢁMultiple titles may not playback continuously depending on the
disc. Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], and playback by selecting the
title.
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
ꢁIt may pause for a few seconds on the break of images when
editing such as partial deletion is performed.
ꢁHigh definition video (transfer rate of 24 Mbps or faster) cannot be
played back correctly if it was recorded on a DVD compatible with
double speed or slower.
This disc is play-only and cannot be recorded or
copied to.
OK
RETURN
SD
e.g.,
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
ꢁDisplay items differ depending on what is recorded in each media.
ꢁIf the top menu of the disc or SD card to play was
–Created:
Display the top menu
–Not created:
Display the “DIRECT NAVIGATOR” screenꢂ
ꢂ
It may not be able to display the “DIRECT NAVIGATOR” screen
3 dePpernedisngson[ the, equ,ipme,nt u]setdotosreecloerdc. t the title
e r w q
and press [OK].
SD
e.g.,
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Video ( AVCHD )
SD CARD
VIDEO
No. Date Day Time
Title Name
Fantasista
001 15.12 SAT 19:36
12:35 2007.12.07
002 07.12 FRI
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Rec time
00:00.07
Page 01/01
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
Playback of the playlist created on other equipment
RAM -RW(VR)
4 Press [ , , , ] to select the
e r w q
Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit.
playlist and press [OK].
Preparation
ꢁInsert a disc.
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Playlists
DVD-RAM
Playlist View
- -
- -
01
02
1
While stopped
05.06(THU) 0:12.12
- -
05.07(MON) 0:07:31
- -
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and
e r
Previous
Next
Page 01/01
OK
OPTION
RETURN
press [OK].
Operation during play (➡ 36)
RAM
e.g.,
FUNCTION MENU
4:00 EP
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
DVD-RAM
Time Remaining
Playback
Playlists
Recording
Delete
DV Automatic Recording
Recording via AV2 input
Network
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Copy
DVD Management
Setup
TV Guide
Others
OK
RETURN
3 Press [ , ] to select “Playlists” and
e r
press [OK].
RQT9487
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DivX
Using the tree screen to find a folder
Playing DivX video contents
-R -R DL CD USB
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [OPTION].
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:
DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official
DivX Certified device that plays DivX video.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Select Folder”, and press
e r
[OK].
You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
Select Folder
F: Selected folder no./Total
folder no. including DivX
title.
F
1/21
12_02_2009
1 Insert a disc or USB memory.
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
-R -R DL CD
CD
e.g.,
OK
RETURN
CD
You cannot select folders
that contain no compatible
files.
Page 01/01
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
3 Press [ , ] to select a folder and press [OK].
e r
Select file type.
The file list for the folder appears.
OK
RETURN
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
ꢁIt will go to step 3 automatically if it is only DivX that is
recorded.
USB
USB device
Play Video ( DivX )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
ꢁDisplay items differ depending on what is recorded in each media.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Play Video
e r
(DivX)” and press [OK].
CD
e.g.,
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
DivX
No.
001
Title Name
ABC.divx
OK
RETURN
Select
OPTION
a
folder from OPTION menu.
Page 01/01
ꢁFiles are treated as titles.
3 Press [ , ] to select the title and
e r
press [OK].
Play starts on the selected title.
To stop playing
Press [ ].
g
To show other pages
Press [
,
u i
].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
If the menu screen (➡ above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
-R -R DL CD
Press [
, ] to select “Playback” and press [OK].
e r
USB
1 Press [
2 Press [
, ] to select “Others” and press [OK].
e r
,
e r
] to select “USB device” and press [OK].
Note
ꢁPicture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect.You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
ꢁSuccessive play is not possible.
ꢁPlayback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD
drive or the DVD drive.
RQT9487
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regarding DivX VOD content
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:
This DivX® Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.
First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your device and
submit it during the registration process. [Important: DivX VOD
content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital Rights Management)
system that restricts playback to registered DivX Certified devices. If
you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device, the
message “Authorisation Error.” will be displayed and your content
will not play.]
Learn more at:
www.divx.com/vod
Display the unit’s registration code.
(➡ 90, “DivX Registration”)
DivX Registration
DivX® Video On Demand
8 alphanumeric characters
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod
ꢁAfter playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
ꢁIf you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number
of times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed.You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)
ꢁThe remaining number of plays decreases each time a program is
played. However, when playing from the point where play was
previously stopped, the remaining number of plays does not
decrease due to the resume play function.
RQT9487
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing titles
HDD RAM
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
+RW
(You cannot edit finalised discs.)
HDD RAM
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
-RW(VR)
Only “Properties” is possible.
button to select “VIDEO”.
2 Press [ , ] to select the title.
Editing of the title can be performed with this unit.
For example, an unnecessary part of the title can be deleted. (➡ 43,
Partial Delete)
e r
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 30:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE
MUSIC
Date Channel Time Title Name
Titles
25.05
01.01 TV ONE
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
TV ONE
12:36
1:35
01.01 TV2
1:13
1
Rec time
1:00(DR)
Not viewed
Page 01/01
Select
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
PICTURE
MUSIC
Play
To show other pages
Press [ ].
Note
,
u i
Multiple editing
Select with [
ꢁOnce deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content
cannot be restored to its original state. Make certain before
proceeding.
,
] and press [ ]. (Repeat.)
e r
h
A check mark appears. Press [ ] again to cancel.
h
ꢁRestricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc.).
3 Press [OPTION].
+R +R DL
ꢁ
Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount
of free space decreases.
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
4 Press [ , ] to select the operation
e r
and press [OK].
ꢁIf you select “Edit”, press [
,
e r
] to select the operation and
Preparation
press [OK].
ꢁTurn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connection to this unit.
Enter Title Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Partial Delete
ꢁTurn the unit on.
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
Play
RAM
ꢁ
Release protection (➡ 80, Setting the protection).
Refer to “Title operations”
(➡ 43, 44).
Divide Title
Delete
Properties
Edit
Change Thumbnail
DR File Conversion
Chapter View
Edit or playback the chapter (➡ 45)
Create Group
HDD
To edit the group of titles
(➡ 38)
Release Grouping
All Titles
HDD
Switching of the Navigator
(➡ 38)
PICTURE / MUSIC
ꢁPlaying still pictures (➡ 58)
ꢁPlaying music recorded on HDD
(➡ 66)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9487
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Title operations
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 42)
Deleteꢂ
Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁOnce deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
proceeding.
ꢁThe available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete
titles.
ꢁAvailable recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last
recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (➡ 24).
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
ꢁPress [OK] to exit the screen.
Properties
Properties
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)
Dinosaur
No.
026
Time
12:19
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)
Channel AV2
You can give names to recorded titles.
(➡ 72, Entering text)
Enter Title Name
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
HDD
ꢁ
Even if the group name is changed (➡ 38), the title names in the group will not be changed.
Set up Protectionꢂ
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
Group
Time Remain
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
Cancel Protectionꢂ
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
Date
HDD RAM +R +R DL +RW
25.05
01.01 AV
01.01 AV
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
Partial Delete
Time Remaining
HDD
20:08 DR VIDEO
PICTURE MUSIC
008
PLAY
1 Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the
HDD RAM
Start
End
(➡ below, For your reference)
section you want to delete.
q
Next
ꢁPress [ ] (PLAY) to start the playback when the title is paused.
Continue
0:43.21
2 Press [ , ] to select “Continue” and press [OK].
e r
Please set the start
point with playback
operation and skip.
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
ꢁSelect “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections. Up to 20
OK
Press RETURN to end Partial Delete function.
sections can be set. (go to step 1, above)
RETURN
3 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁChapter Mark is generated in the scene that was partially deleted.
4 Press [RETURN ].
You can divide a title into two.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title
Divide Title
Time Remaining
HDD
20:08 DR VIDEO
PICTURE MUSIC
008
PLAY
1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.
HDD RAM
Divide
(➡ below, For your reference)
Preview
2 Press [ , ] to select “Continue” and press [OK].
e r
Continue
0:43.21
3 Press [ , ] to select “Divide” and press [OK].
w q
To confirm the division point
Divide
- -:- -.- -
Press [
,
] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10
e r
OK
RETURN
seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Restart play and press [
the title.
,
e r
] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide
Note
ꢁThe divided titles retain the title name of the original title.
ꢁVideo and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
HDD
ꢁ
Divided titles form a group of titles.
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
It is possible to change the image
displayed on the top menu after finalising.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR ChangeThumbnail
Change Thumbnail
HDD
Time Remaining
20:08 DR VIDEO
PICTURE MUSIC
008
h
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
Change
+RW
It is possible to change the image displayed on the top menu after
creating Top Menu.
(➡ below, For your reference)
HDD
Settings for “Change Thumbnail” is saved when high speed copy is
Finish
0:00.00
performed to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R
DL or +RW.
Start play and select the image of
a thumbnail.
Change
- -:- -.- -
OK
1 Press [ ] (PLAY) to start play.
RETURN
q
2 Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a
thumbnail is shown.
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [
,
] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at
e r
the point you want to change.
3 Press [ , ] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
e r
ꢂMultiple editing is possible.
For your reference
ꢁUse Search (➡ 36), Time Slip (➡ 37) to find the desired point.
ꢁTo find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (➡ 36) and Frame-by-frame (➡ 36).
ꢁTo skip to the start or end of a title, press [
] (start) or [
] (end).
u
i
RQT9487
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing titles
Title operations
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 42)
DR File
Conversion
(Converting the recording
mode)
DR File Conversion is a function to convert the recording mode of the title in DR mode. The converted title
will be copied to HDD. It will take about the same time as playback of the title to convert the recording mode.
HDD
DR File Conversion
1 Press [ , ] to select “Recording Mode”.
e r
Convert the selected title by changing its recording
2 Press [ , ] to select the recording mode and
w q
mode.
press [ ].
r
HX -- Normal Quality (HD)
During standby
Recording Mode
Timing
3 Press [ , ] to select when to start the
w q
conversion.
Set
Cancel
“Now”
Conversion begins immediately after
OK
step 5.
RETURN
Recording and playback are not
available during conversion. Note also
that Timer recording will not be
performed during conversion.
“During standby”
The conversion will be performed a short time after switching off the power in
a time slot for which no timer recording is set. If the power is switched on
during the conversion, the conversion will be cancelled, and start from the
beginning when the power is next switched off.
4 Press [ ,
,
,
] to select “Set” and press [OK].
e r w q
5 To begin the conversion “Now”:
Press [ , ] to select “Start” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁTo cancel a conversion that is in progress
Press and hold [RETURN ] for more than 3 seconds.
To begin the conversion “During standby”:
Press [OK].
ꢁTo remove a conversion setting
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 42)
Press [
,
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁConversion begins soon after the power is switched off.
“COPY” on the unit’s display remains lighted during conversion. [Only when “Unit’s Display” in the Setup
menu is set to “Bright” (➡ 88).]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 30:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE MUSIC
Date Channel
Time
21:41
21:41 NZ Views: Fair Go
Title Name
Titles
TVNZ
6
7
27.03
28.03 TVNZ
Shark In The Park
1
1
When “DR file will be converted
in standby.” is displayed in the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR, the
conversion has not finished.
30.03 TV ONE
21:41 How to Look Good Naked
1
Rec time
0:00(DR)
DR file will be
converted in
standby.
Not viewed
Page 01/01
Select
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
PICTURE
MUSIC
Note
ꢁTo use “DR File Conversion”, the HDD needs enough storage capacity. Please make space available on the
HDD.
ꢁThe size of the converted programme may increase for some combinations of programme and recording
mode.
ꢁDR File Conversion is paused when the power is turned on while the recording mode is converting with
power turned off. Conversion will start from the beginning again once the power is turned off.
ꢁThe original programme remains after conversion.
ꢁThe converted one of a title including multiple video and audio content will contain only single video and
audio content. The “DVB Preferred Language” setting in the Setup menu (➡ 84) is applied.
ꢁSubtitles will not display anymore once a title with subtitles is converted.
ꢁWhen converting to XP mode, select the audio to record with “Audio Mode for XP Recording” before
converting the recording mode. (➡ 87)
ꢁSelect the audio to record when converting to “HG”, “HX”, ”HE”, or “HL” modes. (➡ 87, Audio channels for
HG/HX/HE/HL Recording)
ꢁIn titles with the Auto Renewal Recording function (➡ 33) set, a programme may be unintentionally
converted while in “During standby”. So it is recommended to convert the recording mode by selecting
“Now”.
ꢁIf converted to the “HG”, “HX”, “HE”, or “HL” mode, an image of the aspect ratio 4:3 becomes one of the
aspect ratio 16:9 with the side panel. (➡ 78)
RQT9487
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Create/Playback/Edit of the Chapter
HDD RAM
4 Press [ , ] to select the chapter.
w q
To start play Press [OK].
-R -R DL -RW(V) -RW(VR) +R +R DL +RW
Only playback of
chapter is possible.
To edit Step 5.
Regarding Chapters
Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one chapter.
To create Press the “Green” button. (➡ below)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View
Time Remaining 30:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
Title
PICTURE MUSIC
Play
SOCCER
007
Press OK to start playing from
the selected chapter.
Selected chapter can be edited
via OPTION.
Press RETURN to go back to
previous menu.
Chapter
End
Start
0:00.00
001
HDD RAM
You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each
0:00.00
Page 001/001
section between the division points (Chapter Marks) becomes a
chapter.
OPTION
Select
OK
RETURN
Chapter View
Edit Chapter Mark
Title
5 Press [OPTION], then [ , ] to select
e r
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
the operation and press [OK].
Delete Chapter
Refer to “Chapter
operations” (➡ below).
Chapter Mark
Combine Chapters
y The maximum number of chapters on a disc:
(Depends on the state of recording.)
HDD
RAM
: Approx. 1000 per title
: Approx. 1000
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Note
HDD
y
You will not be able to perform the Resume play function
(➡ 36) or “Change Thumbnail” (➡ 43) with a title with the
maximum number of chapters.
Chapter Marks created will be maintained when copied or
used “DR File Conversion” (➡ 44). But, it will not maintain the
Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ left)
HDD
y
exceeded amount if it exceeds the maximum chapter numbers.
Select the point where you want to start a
new chapter while viewing the title.
Create
Chapter
Create Chapter Mark
During the playback or pause
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Edit Chapter Mark
Time Remaining
HDD
30:54 DR VIDEO
PICTURE MUSIC
SOCCER
Play
007
To insert chapter position,
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
y Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
press OK at selected time.
Press RETURN to go to
Chapter View.
0:00.00
OK
RETURN
Chapter View
Edit Chapter Mark
1 Press [OK] at the point you
want to divide.
y Repeat this step to divide at other
points.
Chapter has been created.
2 Press [RETURN ] to go to
Chapter View screen.
■ To delete the Chapter Mark
1 While paused
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
Press [
,
] and skip to the location you
u i
want to delete.
Press [ , ] to select “Delete”
w q
and press [OK].
Delete
ChapterÚ
y Once deleted, the recorded contents are
lost and cannot be restored. Make certain
before proceeding.
2 Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
y Select “Combine Chapters” (➡ below)
when you only want to delete the division
point between chapters. (The recorded
contents will not be deleted.)
Editing and playing chapters
Preparation
y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
RAM
y
Release protection (➡ 80, Setting the protection).
Press [ , ] to select “Combine”
w q
Combine
Chapters
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
and press [OK].
y The selected chapter and following chapter
are combined.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 30:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE MUSIC
Date Channel Time
Title Name Titles
25.05
01.01 TV ONE
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
Ú
Multiple editing (➡ 60) is possible.
01.01 TV2
1:13
1
Rec time
1:00(DR)
Not viewed
OK
Page 01/01
Select
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
Play
PICTURE
MUSIC
HDD RAM
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
2 Press [ , ] to select the title and
e r
press [OPTION].
RQT9487
3 Press [ , ] to select “Chapter View”
e r
and press [OK].
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
There are following copying methods.
Copy Title Playing
Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc. (➡ 49)
Make a copying list and then copy.
You can set the unit to copy titles in the way you want. (➡ 50)
Copy
Copy AVCHD
High definition video (AVCHD format) can be copied from disc, SD card or USB. (➡ 56)
■ Copy direction
Copy source
Copy destination
Possible copying method
Copy speed
ꢁThe high speed copy may not be
possible depending on the
destination disc or the title to copy.
(➡ 48, When is high speed copy
not possible?)
RAM -R -R DL
-RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
Copy Title Playing
Copy
HDD
RAM
-RW(VR)
HDD
HDD
Copy
Copy
High speed
+RW
Normal speed
Before finalise
-R
-R DL
-RW(V)
+R
Cannot copy
+R DL
ꢂ
DVD-V
After finalise
-R
HDD
-R DL
-RW(V)
+R
Copy
Normal speed
High speed
+R DL
HDD
RAM
SD Video (MPEG2 format)
ꢁFrom an SD card or
Panasonic’s video camera,
etc. (from USB)
Copy
-R -R DL
Cannot copy
-RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
HD Video (AVCHD format)
HDD
HDD
Copy AVCHD
Copy AVCHD
High speed
High speed
ꢁFrom discs
HD Video (AVCHD format)
ꢁFrom an SD card or
Panasonic’s video camera,
etc. (from USB)
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
Cannot copy
ꢂ
Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been treated so, cannot be copied using this
unit.
RQT9487
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Copy speed
(ꢃ: Possible, –: Impossible)
Normal speed mode
High speed mode
Features
Copy with shorter time than the recorded time of the
title with same quality (recording mode).
It will take same or longer time as the recorded time
of the titles to be copied.
ꢁEven if you select a recording mode with better
picture quality than the original, the picture quality
does not improve.
Are chapters maintained?
ꢃꢂ1
ꢃ
ꢃꢂ1
ꢃꢂ2
Are thumbnails
maintained?
Recording and Playing
while Copying
ꢃꢂ3
–
ꢂ1 Position of the chapter might shift slightly.
It will not maintain the exceeded amount if it exceeds the maximum chapter numbers on a disc.
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
–
–
: Approx. 1000
: Approx. 254
(Depends on the state of recording.)
ꢂ2 Position of the thumbnails might shift slightly. (May not be maintained depending on the state of recording.)
ꢂ3 Possible only with titles on the HDD
[However it is not possible when copying with finalisation/creating Top Menu or when copying SD Video (MPEG2 format) or when copying HD
Video (AVCHD format).]
–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
–Still pictures or music cannot be played.
RQT9487
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
■ Frequently Asked Questions
When is high speed copy not possible?
It will copy at normal speed in following cases:
y Copying to
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
in following conditions:
–Titles in DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode
–Title of the AVCHD copied to the HDD
y Copying to
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
in following conditions:
–Copy including a title that was recorded to HDD with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to
“Off”
–Titles that contain many deleted segments
–Titles that have been copied to the HDD from an SD card or Panasonic’s video camera,
etc. (➡ 57)
+R +R DL +RW
–
Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)”
mode.
+R +R DL +RW
–
–
Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR (recordings 5
-R -R DL -RW(V)
hours or longer)” mode
y Setting “Recording Mode” to anything but “High Speed” in “Copy”
y Copying from +RW to HDD
y
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
When copying from the finalised disc to HDD
When copying titles in high speed mode
to high speed recording compatible discs
The sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High
Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➡ 85).
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
When copying to disc in normal speed
mode
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal speed to the
HDD and then copied at high speed to the disc. The titles that were temporarily copied to the
HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to the disc in the following cases.
–When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new blank disc, if
you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free
space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)
–When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to be copied to
the disc is greater than 499 in total.
When stopping the copy during copy
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled.
y
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
If copy is cancelled during the step while temporarily
copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is cancelled during the
step while copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point
cancelled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R,
+R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.
Is it possible to copy to the disc, SD card
or USB memory after copying HD video
(AVCHD format) to the HDD?
y It can be copied to the disc.
–It will be copied with SD quality. (It cannot be copied as it is in HD picture quality.)
y It cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory.
MPEG2 or AVCHD files are not
recognised.
y Only MPEG2 or AVCHD recorded or edited on a Panasonic’s video camera will be
recognised. USB memory or an SD card that contains MPEG2 or AVCHD recorded on
devices other than a Panasonic’s video camera may not be recognised.
RQT9487
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Speed and recording mode when copying
Titles in DR, HG, HX, HE or HL mode
Copy Title Playing
Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc.
ꢁIt will start copying from the beginning of the title regardless of the
playing position.
Copy destination
Copy Speed
Recording mode
RAM
-R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
Normal speed
FR
HDD
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
p
1 Playback the title to copy.
Titles in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode
Copy destination
Copy Speed
Recording mode
High speedꢂ1
Same as title to be
copiedꢂ1
RAM
High speedꢂ1 ꢂ2
Same as title to be
copiedꢂ1
-R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
When copying the title in DR mode with multiple audio
and subtitles
ꢁOnly the audio selected in “Audio Selection” in the Disc
menu will be copied for the multiple audio. (➡ 76)
Subtitle will not be copied.
ꢂ1 When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space,
copy will perform at normal speed in FR mode.
ꢂ2 Titles that were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 85)
set to “Off” will be copied with normal speed. In the following
cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, copy will
perform at normal speed.
2 Press [OPTION].
+R +R DL +RW
When the copying source was recorded in
“EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
ꢁ
3 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Title
e r
Playing” and press [OK].
ꢁWhen the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.
ꢁWhen the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for
Recording” (➡ 85) do not match.
4 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
ꢁWhen the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
press [OK].
+R +R DL +RW
-R -R DL -RW(V)
–
–
copying source was recorded in “EP”
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
To return to the previous screen
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy
(➡ 82). To play +RW on other players, we recommend you create
top menu (➡ 82), but they may not play on all DVD players.
Press [RETURN ].
Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.
Press [OK] to disappear the screen display.
ꢁStill pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
ꢁTo confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
RQT9487
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
4 Press [OK].
Copying using the copying list—Copy
ꢁTo edit the copying list (➡ 51)
You cannot start copying when the value of “Size” (➡ 51)
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufficient).
5 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
HDD
RAM +RW
'
-RW(VR)
HDD
HDD
p
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
p
You can order titles as desired for copy to disc.
6 Set to make it possible to play on
1
While stopped
other equipment.
(“Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”)
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
HDD
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
only)
(
p
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy” and
e r
If it is not to be set (➡ step 7).
1 Press [
,
] to select “Other Setting” and press [ ].
q
e r
press [OK].
2 Press [OK].
3 Press [
,
] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
e r
Copy
ꢁIf “On” is selected
Cancel All
Source
HDD
DVD
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
–
After finalising, the discs
1 Copy Direction
HDD
DVD
Destination
become play-only and you can also play them on other
DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or
edit.
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
Information of the copy destination
-
-
DVD-RAM
Copy restricted titles can be
3 Create List
0
copied on to disc
+RW
–
Create the Top Menu. Top Menu is a convenient
Start Copying
function. We recommend you create the menu before
playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
4 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
ꢁIf you are not going to change each setting (➡ step 7).
3 Set the copy direction.
7 Press [ , ] to select “Start Copying”
e r
ꢁIf you are not going to change the copying direction
(➡ step 4).
and press [OK].
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
,
] to select “Copy Direction” and press [ ].
] to select “Source” and press [OK].
] to select the drive and press [OK].
e r
q
8 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
,
e r
,
e r
[OK] to start copying.
If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to
“DVD” or vice versa. (➡ go to step 6)
To return to the previous screen in steps 1 to 8
4 Press [
,
] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
e r
Press [RETURN ].
5 Press [
,
] to select the drive and press [OK].
e r
While copying after step 8
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising or creatinig Top Menu.)
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
4 Set the recording mode.
ꢁIf you are not going to change the recording mode
Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising or creating Top
Menu).
(➡ step 5).
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
4 Press [
[OK].
,
] to select “Copy Mode” and press [ ].
e r
q
,
] to select “Format” and press [OK].
] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
] to select “Recording Mode” and press
e r
,
e r
Press [OK] to disappear the screen display.
ꢁStill pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
ꢁTo confirm the current progress
,
e r
5 Press [
,
] to select the mode and press [OK].
e r
Press [STATUS ].
6 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
Note
ꢁTitles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered
simultaneously.
5 Register titles for copy.
ꢁIf you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 6).
1 Press [
,
e r
] to select “Create List” and press [ ].
q
Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343 MB
(
0% )
Size:
0 MB
Title
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
New item (Total=0)
HDD
DVD
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
3 Create List
0
Start Copying
Page 01/01
OK
RETURN
Create copy list.
OPTION
2 Press [
,
e r
] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Create List
Grouped Titles
HDD
Date Channel Time
Title Name
Title
25.05
01.01 TV ONE
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
01.01 TV2
1:13
1
Time
12:36
Rec time
0:52(SP)
Page 01/01
Select
OK
RETURN
OPTION
3 Press [
,
] to select the title and press [ ].
e r
h
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
ꢁThe items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
ꢁWhen copying to a disc using high speed mode, only titles
indicated with “
ꢁTo show other pages
Press [ ].
” can be registered.
,
u i
RQT9487
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ To check the properties of a title and sort
Copying list
After performing steps 5–2 (➡ 50)
Copying list icons and functions
Copying list indicators
Titles that can be copied in high speed mode to
the inserted disc
1 Press [ , ] to select the title and press
e r
[OPTION].
Title contains still picture(s)
y Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
Properties
Sort
Title recorded using a different encoding system
from that of the TV system currently selected on
the unit.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Grouped Titles
y Titles displaying these marks cannot be
selected.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Properties” or “Sort” and
e r
press [OK].
Data size of each registered item
Properties:
Size:
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
shown. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
(
0% )
Size:
0 MB
Data size recorded to the copy
destination
y When copying at normal speed, the
total data size will change according to
the recording mode.
y The total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes
for each registered item, because of
data management information being
written to the copy destination, etc.
No. Size
Title
New item (Total=0)
Sort (All Titles screen only):
Press [
,
] to select the item and press [OK].
e r
This changes the way that titles are displayed.You can select to
display titles by No., Date, Day, Channel, Start time and Title name.
(You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.) If you close the
Copying list screen, the display order is cancelled.
Page 01/01
■ To edit the copying list
Select the item after step 5–4 (➡ 50)
1 Press [OPTION].
Delete All
Add
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy
(➡ 82). To play +RW on other players, we recommend you create
top menu (➡ 82), but they may not play on all DVD players.
Delete
2 Press [
,
e r
] to select the operation and press
[OK].
Move
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [
,
w q
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
1
Press [ ] to select the title and press [ ].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
,
e r
h
y Press [ ] again to cancel.
Press [OK].
h
2
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [
,
w q
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying
list.
Press [
,
e r
] to select the destination and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–2 (➡ 50)
1
2
Press [
Press [
,
] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
e r
,
w q
y The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at
the copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
RQT9487
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL
4
When the top menu is displayed
Press [ , , , ] to select the title
e r w q
you want to start copying, and press
[OK].
DVD-V
HDD
p
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit. While
playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
ꢁWhen “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 85) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 85) in the Setup menu.
My favourite
01/02
01
02
Chapter
1
Chapter
2
03
04
Chapter
3
Chapter
4
05
06
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
ꢁOperations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
ꢁAlmost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
To return to the previous screen in steps 1 to 3
Press [RETURN ].
Preparation
ꢁInsert the finalised disc (➡ 15).
To stop copying after step 3
Press [ ].
g
You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
ꢁIf stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
After performing steps 1–4 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-
Video”) (➡ 50, Copying using the copying list—Copy)
Note
1 Set “Copy Time”.
ꢁThe screen on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
ꢁIf you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 2).
ꢁThe content is recorded as 1 title from the
start of copy to the end.
1 Press [
,
] to select “Copy Time” and press [ ].
] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].
e r
q
2 Press [
,
e r
ꢁIf play does not begin automatically or if the
top menu does not display automatically,
ꢁSetting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [ ] to select “Off” and press [OK].
,
e r
press [ ] (PLAY) to start.
q
4 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
ꢁEven if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
ꢁIf you want to copy a title from a DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording
format), create a copying list and then copy (➡ 50, Copying using
the copying list—Copy).
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
ꢁSetting the copying time
3 Press [
,
] to select “On” and press [OK].
e r
4 Press [ ,
e r
] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
DVD
HDD
2
Hour
00 Min.
2 Copy Mode
DVD-Video SP
Set the time
a
few minutes longer.
3 Copy Time
2:00
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
Press OK to change the setting.
5 Press [
,
] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [
,
e r
]
w q
to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
ꢁSet a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Start Copying”
e r
and press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
[OK] to start copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
ꢁDisc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising
the disc (➡ 82).
RQT9487
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording broadcasts from external equipment
HDD
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 26).
e.g., Connecting to the AV2 terminals on the front
ꢁTurn off the unit and external equipment before connecting.
This unit
VIDEO L/MONO - AUDIO- R
AV2 IN
S VIDEO
S Video
cableꢂ
Audio/video
cable
External equipment
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
ꢂ
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
Preparation
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
ꢁWhen the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 88).
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
e.g., If you have connected to AV2 input terminals, select
“AV2”.
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
ꢁDR, HG, HX, HE, HL, FR mode cannot be selected.
3 Select the channel on the other
equipment.
4 Press [ REC].
*
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [ ] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
h
To stop recording
Press [ ].
g
RQT9487
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying from a video cassette recorder
e.g., Connecting to the AV2 or DV input terminals on the front
DV Automatic Recording
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
ꢁTurn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
Preparation
1
Turn off this unit and DV equipment, then connect the equipment
with the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ left).
Turn on this unit.
2
This unit
ꢁIf you record to a disc, insert a disc (➡ 15).
RAM
ꢁ
If the disc is protected, release protection (➡ 80, Setting the
protection).
VIDEO
L/MONO - AUDIO- R
S VIDEO
DV IN
AV2 IN
ꢁWhen the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 88).
1 Turn on the DV equipment, and pause
play at the point you want recording
DV cable
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)
S Video
cableꢂ
Audio/video
cable
to start.
The following screen appears.
DV Automatic Recording
Other video equipment
Record from the DV unit?
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
Rec to HDD
Rec to DVD
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Connect to L/MONO on the AV2 input terminals at the front.
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
OK
RETURN
ꢂ
VIDEO terminal.
ꢁWhen the screen is not displayed
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
ꢁUse only DV cable with ferrite core.
ꢁSelect the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”
in the Setup menu (➡ 87).
When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),
you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.
After performing step 1
1
2
3
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [
Press [
,
] to select “Others” and press [OK].
] to select “DV Automatic Recording” and
e r
,
e r
ꢁ
press [OK].
➡ Go to step 2.
ꢁWhen “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 85) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 85) in the Setup menu.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Rec to HDD” or
e r
“Rec to DVD” and press [OK].
Recording of 16:9 image such as wide broadcasting (➡ 26)
ꢁIt may take a while for the next screen to display while
preparing to record.
Note
ꢁIf video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit,
then the video quality will be degraded.
ꢁWhile copying from DV input or executing “Recording via AV2
input” (➡ 55)
–Copy will stop when timer recording starts.
–Chasing playback, simultaneous rec and play, switching of the
broadcast or input cannot be performed.
3 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
ꢁDR, HG, HX, HE, HL, FR mode cannot be selected.
4 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
press [OK].
Manual recording
HDD
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press [ ].
g
Preparation
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
ꢁWhen recording bilingual programmes, select “M 1” or “M 2” on the
external equipment.
Note
ꢁOnly one piece of DV equipment (e.g., Panasonic’s video camera,
etc.) can be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
ꢁIt is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV
equipment.
ꢁWhen the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 88).
ꢁThe DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
ꢁThe DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
ꢁDepending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
ꢁThe date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment
will not be recorded.
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
e.g., If you have connected to AV2 input terminals, select “AV2”.
ꢁYou cannot record and play simultaneously.
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
-R +R
ꢁ
It may not be able to record after repeating about 30 times
of step 4 or recording or editing.
recording mode.
-R -RW(V)
ꢁ
After finalising, chapters for every 5 minutes will be
ꢁDR, HG, HX, HE, HL, FR mode cannot be selected.
created.
+R
ꢁ
ꢁ
After finalising, chapters for every 8 minutes will be created.
3 Start play on the other equipment.
+RW
Regardless of creating the top menu, chapters for every 8
minutes will be created.
4
When you want to start recording
Press [ REC].
*
If the DV Automatic Recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (➡ left).
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [ ] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
h
To stop recording
Press [ ].
g
Using Flexible Recording via AV input (➡ 55)
RQT9487
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been
treated so, cannot be recorded using this unit.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording via AV2 input
RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
Flexible Recording via AV input
(Recording that fits the size of a new DVD)
HDD
It is possible to record to disc from equipment connected to the AV2
input terminals.
The title is recorded to the size of a new DVD (4.7 GB) by
automatically selecting optimal quality between XP and EP (8
hours).
Recording mode is FR mode. (➡ 28)
Preparation
Preparation
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
ꢁPress [INPUT SELECT] to select “AV1”, “AV2” or “DV”.
ꢁWhen the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 88).
RAM
ꢁ
If the disc is protected, release protection (➡ 80, Setting the
protection).
ꢁWhen the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 88).
1
While stopped
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and
e r
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and
e r
press [OK].
press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Flexible
e r
3 Press [ , ] to select “Recording via
e r
Recording via AV input” and press
[OK].
AV2 input” and press [OK].
ꢁIt may take a while for the next screen to display while
preparing to record.
Flexible Recording via AV input
Record in FR mode.
Maximum recording time
Recording via AV2 input
Please set recording time.
Maximum recording time
Record in FR mode.
8 hour 00 min.
Set recording time
8 hour 00 min.
Set recording time
8
00
Hour
Min.
OK
Start Cancel
8
00
Min.
Hour
Start Cancel
Recording will stop when
timer recording starts.
RETURN
OK
RETURN
4 Press [ , ] to select “Hour” and
w q
“Min.” and press [ , ] to set the
e r
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum recording time in
EP (8 hours) mode.
recording time.
ꢁYou can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
4 Press [ , ] to select “Hour” and
w q
ꢁYou cannot record more than 8 hours.
“Min.” and press [ , ] to set the
e r
5 Start play on the other equipment.
recording time.
ꢁYou can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
6
When you want to start recording
Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
ꢁYou cannot record more than 8 hours.
press [OK].
Recording starts.
5 Start play on the other equipment.
6
When you want to start recording
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN ].
Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
To stop recording partway
Press [ ].
g
press [OK].
Recording starts.
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS ].
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN ].
Note
-R +R
ꢁ
It may not be able to record after repeating about 30 times
To stop recording partway
Press [ ].
g
of step 6 or recording or editing.
-R -RW(V)
ꢁ
After finalising, chapters for every 5 minutes will be
created.
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS ].
+R
ꢁ
ꢁ
After finalising, chapters for every 8 minutes will be created.
+RW
Regardless of creating the top menu, chapters for every 8
minutes will be created.
RQT9487
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copy the HD Video (AVCHD format) or the SD Video (MPEG2 format)
Copying HD Video (AVCHD format)
It is possible to copy the HD video (AVCHD format) recorded on the Panasonic’s video camera, etc. to the HDD.
■ From an SD card or Discs
■ From a video equipment
AVCHD
AVCHD
HDD
(Disc) p
(SD card) p
HDD
HDD of Panasonic’s video camera, etc. p
HDD
ꢁYou cannot playback HD Video in the HDD of Panasonic’s
video camera, etc. with this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD.
HDD
HDD
HDD
USB connection
cable
(specified cable such
as accessory of the
USB equipment)
1 Insert a disc or card.
SD
e.g.,
Preparation
SD Card
Turn on both this unit and the Panasonic’s video camera, etc.
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
1 Connect the Panasonic’s video
camera, etc. to this unit.
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
2 Select the appropriate mode that
makes the Panasonic’s video camera,
etc. ready for data transfer (such as
“PC CONNECT”) on the Panasonic’s
ꢁDisplay items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Video
e r
(AVCHD)” and press [OK].
video camera, etc.
ꢁRefer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
3 The confirmation screen appears and
USB device
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
press [OK].
4 Press [ , ] to select the title and
e r
press [ ].
h
USB device is inserted.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary titles.
OK
RETURN
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
h
ꢁDisplay items differ depending on what is recorded in the
USB device.
5 Press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Video
e r
(AVCHD)” and press [OK].
6 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
press [OK].
4 The confirmation screen appears and
press [OK].
5 Press [ , ] to select the title and
e r
press [ ].
h
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary titles.
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
Note
ꢁRecord, playback or timer recording cannot be executed while copying.
ꢁCopy cannot be executed while recording or playback.
ꢁAn AVCHD title with more than 100 scenes will be divided into titles every 99th scene and copied.
ꢁCopied video will be displayed as “AVCHD” in the “Channel” column of the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
ꢁDepending on the recording condition with the high definition camera, scenes recorded on same day might have different titles (“-1”, “-2”
appended to date).
ꢁSee the instructions of the equipment used to record.
ꢁAfter copying AVCHD to HDD, it can be copied to DVDs with standard definition quality. Therefore, it is not recommended to delete original
AVCHD.
RQT9487
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying SD Video (MPEG2 format)
It is possible to copy the SD video (MPEG2 format) recorded on the Panasonic’s video camera, etc. to the HDD or disc.
■ From an SD card
■ From a video equipment
SD
HDD RAM
HDD RAM
HDD of Panasonic’s video camera, etc. p
p
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
HDD
DVD-RAM
HDD
DVD-RAM
1 Insert a card.
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
USB connection cable
(specified cable such as accessory
of the USB equipment)
SD card is inserted.
OK
Preparation
RETURN
Turn on both this unit and the Panasonic’s video camera, etc.
ꢁDisplay items differ depending on what is recorded in the
card.
1 Connect the Panasonic’s video
camera, etc. to this unit.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Video
e r
(MPEG2)” and press [OK].
2 Select the appropriate mode that
makes the Panasonic’s video camera,
etc. ready for data transfer (such as
“PC CONNECT”) on the Panasonic’s
3 Press [ , ] to select “Start Copying”,
e r
then press [OK].
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list—Copy” (➡ 50).
Please set the items in steps 3 and 4 as shown below.
video camera, etc.
ꢁRefer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
Copy Direction:
Source :SD CARD
USB device
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Mode:
Format :VIDEO
ꢁSD Video on an SD card are automatically registered on the
copying list.
USB device is inserted.
OK
4 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
RETURN
ꢁDisplay items differ depending on what is recorded in the
[OK] to start copying.
USB device.
3 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Video
e r
(MPEG2)” and press [OK].
4 Press [ , ] to select “Start Copying”,
e r
then press [OK].
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list—Copy” (➡ 50).
Please set the items in steps 3 and 4 as shown below.
Copy Direction:
Source :USB
Copy Mode:
Format :VIDEO
ꢁSD Video on the Panasonic’s video camera, etc. are
automatically registered on the copying list.
5 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
[OK] to start copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
Note
ꢁYou cannot playback SD Video on an SD card or in the HDD of Panasonic’s video camera, etc. with this unit.You must copy the files to the
HDD or a DVD-RAM.
ꢁYou cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
RQT9487
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing still pictures
HDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB SD
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
ꢁYou can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW, USB memory and SD card.
ꢁYou cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.
HDD RAM
ꢁWhen “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button
to select “PICTURE”.
ꢁStill pictures copied from SD cards and USB memories are
grouped by the shooting date on Pictures by Date screen.
Preparation
RAM -R -R DL CD USB SD
ꢁ
Insert a disc, USB memory, or SD
card. (➡ 15)
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
Select “DVD” for any discs.
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [
,
] to select “Album View” or “Pictures by Date”
e r
and press [OK].
The display below automatically appears when you insert an SD
card, USB memory or the discs while stopped.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
001
Album View
20:08 DR
Pictures by Date
Time Remaining
Time Remaining
20:08 DR
PICTURE
PICTURE
MUSIC
VIDEO
MUSIC
VIDEO
Press [
,
] to select “Play Pictures (JPEG)” and press [OK].
001
002
002
e r
Then go to step 2 (➡ right).
trip
Total 19
penguins
08.02.2007
Total 19
04.02.2008
Total
9
Total
9
-R -R DL CD
ꢁ
It will go to step 2 (➡ right) automatically if it is
only still pictures that is recorded.
Press OK to display pictures.
Press OK to display pictures.
Page 01/01
Page 01/01
OPTION
h
Select
OPTION
h
Select
Disc
e.g.,
OK
OK
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
q
Slideshow
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
q
Slideshow
RETURN
RETURN
CD
Album View screen
Pictures by Date screen
CD
Play Video ( DivX )
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play/Copy Music ( MP3 )
Picture and Album protected.
Select file type.
OK
HDD
RETURN
Date that has not yet been viewed
(Only still pictures copied with “Copy All Pictures” or
“Copy New Pictures”)
USB
e.g.,
e.g.,
USB device
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
To show other pages
Press [ ].
,
u i
USB device is inserted.
2 Press [ , , , ] to select the album
e r w q
OK
RETURN
of “Album View” or the date of
“Pictures by Date” and press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
SD
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
HDD
e.g.,
Time Remaining
20:08 DR
PICTURE
VIDEO
MUSIC
04.02.2007
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
Page 001/001
ꢁDisplay items differ depending on what is recorded in each
OK
OPTION
Select
h
q
Slideshow
media.
RETURN
If the menu screen (➡ above) is not displayed, display it by
3 Press [ , , , ] to select the still
e r w q
performing the following operation.
picture and press [OK].
-R -R DL CD USB SD
ꢁPress [
,
] to display the previous or next still picture.
w q
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
-R -R DL CD SD
ꢁUseful functions during still picture play (➡ 59)
Press [
,
e r
] to select “Playback” and press [OK].
USB
To return to previous screen
1 Press [
2 Press [
, ] to select “Others” and press [OK].
e r
Press [RETURN ].
,
e r
] to select “USB device” and press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9487
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful functions during still picture play
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.
Start
Slideshow
1 Press [ ,
,
,
] to select the album or date.ꢂ
e r w q
2 Press [q] (PLAY).
You can also start Slideshow with following steps.
After performing step 1 (➡ above)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [ ] to select “Start Slideshow” and press [OK].
,
e r
To end the slideshow
Press [RETURN ].
1
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the album or date.ꢂ
Slideshow
Settings
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Press [e, r] to select “Slideshow Settings” and press [OK].
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
4 After completing the following settings, press [e, r, w, q] to
select “Set” and press [OK].
ꢁTo change the display interval
After performing steps 1–3
Slideshow Settings
Please set the following functions.
Display interval
Transition Effect
Repeat Play
Soundtrack
Normal
Fade
1 Press [
,
] to select “Display interval”.
] to select the desired interval.
e r
2 Press [ ,
w q
On
Off
ꢁTo change the transition effect
After performing steps 1–3
Select Soundtrack
Set
Sample Soundtrack
Cancel
1 Press [
2 Press [
“Fade”
,
] to select “Transition Effect”.
] to select the transition effect.
: Pictures are changed by fading out and fading in.
e r
,
w q
RETURN
“Motion” : Pictures are changed by fading out and fading in, while it is
enlarged, reduced, or moved up or down.
“Random”: In addition to the “Motion”, pictures are changed by various methods.
ꢁTo set repeat play
After performing steps 1–3
1 Press [
,
] to select “Repeat Play”.
] to select “On” or “Off”.
e r
2 Press [ ,
w q
ꢁTo playback the music
Sample music in this unit or music stored on the HDD (My Favourites or Playlist) (➡ 67, 69) can be played during
the playback of the Slideshow.
After performing steps 1–3
Select Soundtrack
HDD
e.g.,
Please select music playlist for soundtrack.
1 Press [
,
] to select “Soundtrack”.
] to select “On”.
e r
2 Press [ ,
w q
Sample Soundtrack
My Favourites
ꢁTo change the music to playback
After performing steps 1–3
01
02
03
1 Press [
,
] to select “Select Soundtrack” and press [OK].
] to select the music playlist and press [OK].
e r
2 Press [ ,
e r
OK
RETURN
While playing
Rotate
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].
e r
ꢁRotation information will not be stored in the following cases.
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
-R -R DL CD USB
–
Still pictures
OK
–When disc or card is protected
–When played on other equipment
–When copying pictures
RETURN
–When changing date
ꢁIf you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation information may not
be properly stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
Zoom in
Zoom out
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
2 Press [ , ] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].
e r
e r
Zoom in
ꢁ
Press [
,
] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press [OK] to resume the display size of the still picture.
OK
ꢁWhen zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
ꢁThe Zoom in information will not be stored.
RETURN
ꢁThis function is only available for small-sized still pictures.
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
Properties
1 Press [ ,
e r w q
3 Press [OPTION].
,
,
] to select the album or date and press [OK].ꢂ
] to select the still picture.
e r w q
2 Press [ ,
,
,
4 Press [ , ] to select “Properties” and press [OK].
e r
HDD
e.g.,
While playing
2:00:00 01.01.2009
ꢄRemain HDD 30:30 DR
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Press [STATUS ] twice.
Date
0
1.01.2009
No.
3 / 9
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS ].
Shooting date
ꢂ
To switch the “Album View” or “Pictures by Date” (➡ 58, step 1)
RQT9487
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing still pictures
Editing still pictures (JPEG)
3 Press [ , ] to select the operation
e r
HDD RAM SD
and press [OK]
y Editing can be done in units of pictures, albums or dates.
y You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-
R/CD-RW and USB memory.
HDD
(e.g.,
Pictures by Date)
Album View
Useful functions during still picture play
(➡ 59)
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Copy
Preparation
y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
RAM SD
y
Release protection (➡ 11, 80, Setting the protection).
Copy to Album
Copy to New Album
Copy to DVD-RAM
Change Date
Delete
1
While stopped
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
VIDEO / MUSIC
HDD RAM
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”.
Still pictures operation (➡ 61)
HDD RAM
HDD
(e.g.,
Album View)
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance
1 Press [OPTION].
Useful functions during still picture play
(➡ 59)
Pictures by Date
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Copy Album
2 Press [
,
] to select “Album View” or “Pictures by Date”
e r
and press [OK].
Copy to Album
HDD
e.g.,
Copy to New Album
Copy to DVD-RAM
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Pictures by Date
Pictures by Date screen
Time Remaining
20:08 DR
PICTURE
VIDEO
MUSIC
001
002
Edit Album
Enter Album Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
08.09.2006
Total 19
04.02.2007
Delete Album
Total
9
VIDEO / MUSIC
Press OK to display pictures.
Page 01/01
OPTION
h
Select
OK
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
q
Slideshow
RETURN
Still pictures operation (➡ 61)
2
Editing an album or date:
HDD
(e.g.,
Picture (JPEG) View from Pictures by Date)
Useful functions during still picture play
Select the album or date to be edited
and press [OPTION].
Editing a still picture:
Start Slideshow
(➡ 59)
Slideshow Settings
Properties
1 Select the album or date which contains
the still picture to edit and press [OK].
Copy to Album
Copy Pictures
Edit Pictures
Delete Pictures
Pictures by Date
Copy to New Album
HDD
e.g.,
Change Date
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
Time Remaining
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
20:08 DR
PICTURE
VIDEO
MUSIC
04.02.2007
Still pictures operation (➡ 61)
Page 001/001
OK
OPTION
Select
h
q
Slideshow
RETURN
SD
(e.g.,
Album View)
2 Select the still pictures to edit and press
[OPTION].
To show other pages
Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 59)
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Edit Album
Enter Album Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Press [
,
].
u i
Multiple editing
Select with [
Delete Album
,
,
,
] and press [ ]. (Repeat.)
e r w q
h
A check mark appears. Press [ ] again to cancel.
h
Still pictures operation (➡ 61)
SD
(e.g.,
Picture (JPEG) View)
Useful functions during still picture play
(➡ 59)
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Properties
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Edit Pictures
Delete Pictures
Album View
Still pictures operation (➡ 61)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9487
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Still pictures operation
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
Copy to Albumꢂ
Copy the selected album, date or pictures to an existing album.
1 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and press [OK].
w q
HDD RAM
2 Press [ ,
,
e r w q
,
] to select the destination album and press [OK].
ꢁThe destination album with protect setting cannot be copied to.
ꢁAfter copying, the screen shows the Album View automatically.
Copy to New Albumꢂ
Copy the selected album, date or pictures to new album.
1 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and press [OK].
w q
HDD RAM
2 Press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁIf “Yes” is selected:
You can give a name to the album. (➡ 72, Entering text)
ꢁIf “No” is selected:
Date of the first recorded picture in the album becomes the album name automatically. (If
there is no information about the recording date, it will become “--.--.----”.)
ꢁAfter copying, the screen shows the Album View automatically.
Press [ , ] to select “Start” and press [OK].
w q
Copy to DVD-RAM
HDD
Copy to HDD
RAM
Change Dateꢂ
HDD RAM
(Pictures by Date only)
Change the date of a folder and move the picture in it into the folder of the changed date.
1 Press [ , ] to select the item and press [ , ] to change.
w q
e r
2 Press [OK].
ꢁYou can also change the date of a picture.
ꢁDate folder of the original is maintained even if all original pictures were deleted after
changing the date of folder. Delete it if unrequired.
ꢁIf there is no folder with the changed date, a new folder will be created.
You can give a name to the album.
(➡ 72, Entering text)
Enter Album Name
HDD RAM SD
ꢁAlbum names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.
(Album View only)
Set up Protectionꢂ
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.
Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
Cancel Protectionꢂ
The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected.
ꢁEven if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album, the album may be
deleted by another unit.
HDD RAM SD
(Album View and Picture (JPEG) View only)
Deleteꢂ
Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁOnce deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before
Delete Albumꢂ
proceeding.
Delete Picturesꢂ
RAM SD
ꢁ
If there is a file other than DCF format or other folder exists in the date or album,
only the pictures will be deleted, and the date or the album itself will not be deleted.
HDD RAM SD
ꢂ
Multiple editing (➡ 60) is possible.
[Copy to Album, Copy to New Album, Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is displayed]
Note
ꢁTimer recordings do not start when performing “Copy to Album”, “Copy to New Album”, “Change Date”, “Copy to DVD-RAM” or “Copy to HDD”.
RQT9487
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying still pictures
HDD RAM USB SD
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Pictures
e r
ꢁPictures copied from SD card and USB memory will be
categorised according to the shooting date. Pictures without
shooting date will be categorised using the creation date.
ꢁYou cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/
CD-RW.
ꢁIf the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 112), copying
will stop partway through.
(JPEG)” and press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Copy” and
w q
press [OK].
ꢁProtection of the card is
–Set: Copy will start.
ꢁYou cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
ꢁTimer recording will not start while copying still pictures.
–Not set: Go to step 4.
4 Press [ , ] to select “Copy & Delete”
w q
Copying all the still pictures on the
USB memory—Copy All Pictures
or “Copy Only” and press [OK].
If “Copy & Delete” is selected
Copied pictures in the SD card will be deleted after copying.
If “Copy Only” is selected
USB
HDD
p
Pictures will not be deleted.
1
While stopped
ꢁ
will be displayed on the Pictures by Date screen of the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR for the added pictures.
Insert the USB memory.
The menu is automatically displayed.
ꢁIf the menu is not displayed (➡ 58).
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy from
Copy to
USB
HDD
USB device
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Note
ꢁThis unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and
30 SD cards. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older
information will be deleted.
Copy all pictures ( JPEG ) by date.
Copy Cancel
USB device is inserted.
OK
OK
RETURN
RETURN
Copying using the copying list
HDD
ꢁDisplay items differ depending on what is recorded in the
RAM SD
RAM
HDD RAM
'
USB memory.
SD
USB
'
p
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Pictures
e r
(JPEG)” and press [OK].
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Copy” and
w q
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy” and
e r
press [OK].
press [OK].
ꢁ
will be displayed on the Pictures by Date screen of the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR for the added pictures.
Copy
Cancel All
Source
DVD
HDD
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
1 Copy Direction
DVD
HDD
Destination
2 Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
Note
3 Create List
0
ꢁThe structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same
at the copy destination.
Start Copying
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
Copying new still pictures on the SD
card—Copy New Pictures
ꢁIf you are not going to change the each setting (➡ 63,
step 6).
3 Set the copy direction.
SD
HDD
p
This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if
still pictures are imported from the same SD card, then only new
still pictures will be imported.
ꢁIf you are not going to change the copying direction
(➡ step 4).
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
4 Press [
5 Press [
,
] to select “Copy Direction” and press [ ].
e r
,
q
] to select “Source” and press [OK].
] to select the drive and press [OK].
] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
] to select the drive and press [OK].
e r
1
While stopped
,
e r
,
e r
Insert the SD card.
,
e r
The menu is automatically displayed.
ꢁIf the menu is not displayed (➡ 58).
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )
4 Set the copy mode.
Copy from
Copy to
SD CARD
HDD
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
ꢁIf you are not going to change the recording mode (➡ 63,
step 5).
Copy added pictures ( JPEG ) by date.
Copy Cancel
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
,
] to select “Copy Mode” and press [ ].
] to select “Format” and press [OK].
] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].
e r
,
q
e r
SD card is inserted.
OK
OK
RETURN
,
e r
RETURN
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
ꢁDisplay items differ depending on what is recorded in the
4 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
SD card.
RQT9487
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Register still pictures for copy.
6 Press [ , ] to select “Start Copying”
e r
ꢁIf you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 6).
and press [OK].
HDD
ꢁ[Only when copied with “By Picture (Album)” from
ꢁPictures from different dates or albums will not be registered
to same list.
RAM SD
RAM
HDD SD
to
to
or from
]
When specifying another album as the copying
destination, select “Album”.
Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
1 Copy Direction
By Picture
(
Date
)
New Item
No.
Album
New album
DVD
HDD
Size
Title
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
3 Create List
0
7 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
Page 01/01
Start Copying
OK
[OK] to start copying.
Create copy list.
OPTION
RETURN
1 Press [
,
] to select “Create List” and press [ ].
e r
q
To return to the previous screen in steps 1 to 7
Press [RETURN ].
2 Press [
,
e r
] to select “New Item” and press [OK].
To stop copying after step 7
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
By Picture ( Date )
Title
New Item
No.
Note
Size
New item (Total=0)
ꢁThe sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the
copying list may not be the same at the copy destination.
ꢁIf still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still
pictures.
■ To edit the copying list
Select the item after step 5–3–3 (➡ left)
1 Press [OPTION].
Page 01/01
3 Press [
,
e r
] to select the item and press [OK].
2 Press [
,
] to select the operation and press
e r
Delete All
Add
HDD
SD
e.g.,
e.g.,
[OK].
Delete
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Picture
Album
By Picture ( Date )
By Picture ( Album )
By Date Folder
By Album
Press [
,
w q
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
1 Press [
,
] to select the item and press [ ].
e r
h
Register with “By Picture (Date/Album)”/“Picture”
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
1 Press [
2 Press [
,
] to select “New item” and press [OK].
e r
,
e r w q
,
,
] to select the still picture and press
h
[
].
h
2 Press [OK].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
u i
ꢁPress [
,
] to show other pages.
Press [
,
w q
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
ꢁThe items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item
at a time.
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–2 (➡ 62, Copying using the copying list)
3 Press [
4 Press [
,
] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
e r
ꢁTo select another folder (➡ right)
,
w q
3 Press [OK].
ꢁThe settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
ꢁTo edit the copying list (➡ right)
4 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
Register with “By Date Folder”/“By Album”/“Album”
1 Press [
2 Press [
,
] to select “New item” and press [OK].
e r
,
,
,
] to select the folder and press [ ].
e r w q
h
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
■ To select another folder
After performing step 5–3–1 [➡ left, Register with “By Picture
(Date/Album)”/“Picture”]
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
u i
ꢁPress [
,
] to show other pages.
1 Press [OPTION].
ꢁThe items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item
at a time.
2 Press [OK].
3 Press [
,
,
,
] to select the folder and press [OK].
e r w q
ꢁThe still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
3 Press [OK].
same list.
ꢁTo edit the copying list (➡ right)
4 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
RQT9487
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting still pictures
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
HDD RAM SD
Preparation
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
RAM SD
ꢁ
Release protection (➡ 11, 80, Setting the protection).
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
e r
press [OK].
HDD RAM
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”.
HDD RAM
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [
,
] to select “Album View” or “Pictures by Date”
e r
and press [OK].
DELETE Navigator
001
Pictures by Date
Time Remaining
20:08 DR
PICTURE
VIDEO
MUSIC
002
08.09.2006
Total 19
04.02.2007
Total
9
Press OK to display pictures.
Page 01/01
OPTION
h
Select
OK
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
RETURN
3 Deleting a still picture
1 Press [ , ] to select the album/date
e r w q
,
,
folder which contains the still picture to
delete, then press [OK].
2 Press [ ,
,
,
] to select the still picture,
e r w q
then press [OK].
By using the properties in the option menu, you can confirm
the item that you have selected. (➡ 60, step 2)
Deleting the album/date folder
1 Press [ ,
,
,
] to select the album/date
e r w q
folder you want to delete.
2 Press [DEL].
To show other pages
Press [
,
].
u i
Multiple deleting
Select with [
,
,
,
] and press [ ]. (Repeat.)
e r w q
h
A check mark appears. Press [ ] again to cancel.
h
4 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
w q
press [OK].
The item is deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9487
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing music
Playing MP3 files
Playing music CD
-R -R DL CD USB
While stopped
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
ꢁYou cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while recording.
Insert a music CD.
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database (➡ 70) and
searches for the title information.
1
While stopped
P O W E R E D B Y
Insert a disc or USB memory.
CD
USB device
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play/Copy Music ( MP3 )
Select file type.
OK
USB device is inserted.
RETURN
OK
RETURN
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
ꢁDisplay items differ depending on what is recorded in each media.
Press [
,
e r
] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
-R -R DL CD
ꢁ
Playback will automatically start if only MP3 is
recorded.
ꢁPlayback will automatically start.
0.09
4.30
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
CD
Music List
2 Press [ , ] to select “Play/Copy
e r
March Moon
Does this flower open?
No.
Track Name
March Moon
Artist
Leon I
Music (MP3)” and press [OK].
Playing track
01
02
03
04
05
Does this flower open? Leon I
ꢁPlayback will automatically start.
Go there from here
Good by SAKURA
If eastern wind has gone
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
CD
e.g.,
0.09
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
CD ( MP3 )
Music List
March Moon
Folder: Mexican pops
No.
Track Name
Artist
Leon I
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Slideshow
0001 March Moon
Playing track
Retry access
Copy All
to HDD
Does this flower open? Leon I
0002
0003
0004
0005
Go there from here
Good by SAKURA
If eastern wind has gone
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Playing different track
Press [ ] to select the track and press [OK].
,
e r
Reacquire the CD title
Press the “Yellow” button.
OPTION
Slideshow
OK
RETURN
Copy All
to HDD
Playing different track
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playback of track will stop.
Press [
,
e r
] to select the track and press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Playback of track will stop.
Note
When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes during
music playback, the screen saver is displayed [only when “Screen
Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (➡ 88)]. To return to the
previous screen, press [RETURN ].
If the menu screen (➡ above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
-R -R DL CD
Press [
,
e r
] to select “Playback” and press [OK].
USB
1 Press [
, ] to select “Others” and press [OK].
e r
2 Press [
,
e r
] to select “USB device” and press [OK].
Using the tree screen to find a folder
1 While the Music List is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Select Folder”, and press
e r
[OK].
Selected folder No. /Total folders
If the folder has no track, “– –” is displayed as folder number.
0.09
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Select Folder
March Moon
CD ( MP3 )
MP3 music
001 My favourite
F
7/27
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
You cannot select
folders that contain no
compatible files.
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
OK
002 Standard number
RETURN
3 Press [ ,
,
e r w q
,
] to select a folder and press
[OK].
The Music List for the folder appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Note
When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes during
music playback, the screen saver is displayed [only when “Screen
Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (➡ 88)]. To return to the
previous screen, press [RETURN ].
RQT9487
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing music
Playing music recorded on HDD
3 Press [ , ] to select the track and
e r
Copying music to HDD (➡ 70)
press [OK].
0.09
4.30
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Music List
March Moon
Does this flower open?
No.
Track Name
Artist
Leon I
Playing track
0001 March Moon
Does this flower open? Leon I
0002
0003
0004
0005
1
While stopped
Go there from here
Good by SAKURA
If eastern wind has gone
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button
to select “MUSIC”.
OPTION
Slideshow
OK
RETURN
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Music Menu
Total Tracks 53
Add to My
Favourites
MUSIC
VIDEO PICTURE
Playing different track
Artists
Press [
,
e r
] to select the track and press [OK].
Albums
My Favourites
Playlists
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Frequently Played
To exit the screen
Random Play
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playback of track will stop.
OPTION
VIDEO
Please select to access music.
PICTURE MUSIC
OK
RETURN
Note
ꢁYou cannot play music tracks on HDD while copying.
2 Press [ , ] to select the item and
e r
ꢁWhen this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes during
music playback, the screen saver is displayed [only when “Screen
Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (➡ 88)]. To return to the
previous screen, press [RETURN ].
press [OK].
Artists
1
2
Albums
My Favourites
Playlists
3
4
5
Frequently Played
Random Play
6
1 Categorise by artist
2 Categorise by album
3 Tracks registered in “My Favourites”
4 Tracks registered in “Playlists”
5 Tracks played most within 200 tracks played recently
(up to 30 tracks)
6 Random playback of all tracks
■ When “Artists” is selected
1 Press [
2 Press [
[OK].
,
] to select the initial of the artist.
] to select the name of the artist, and press
w q
,
e r
3 Press [
,
e r
] to select the album, and press [OK].
■ When “Albums” is selected
w q
1 Press [
2 Press [
,
] to select the initial of the album.
] to select the album, and press [OK].
,
e r
RQT9487
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful functions during music play
HDD -R -R DL CD USB
Operations during play
Press [ ].
g
Stop
Pause
Press [ ].
h
Press [ ] again or [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
h
q
Press [
] or [
].
y
t
Search
Skip
Press [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
q
During play or while paused
Press [
] or [
].
u
i
Skip to the track you want to play.
ꢁEach press increases the number of skips.
While Music List screen is displayed
Register a track to
Press [ ] to select the track and press the “Green” button.
,
e r
“My Favourites”
ꢁUp to 99 tracks can be registered.
HDD
While Music List screen is displayed
Properties
1
2
3
Press [ ] to select title.
,
e r
HDD
Press [OPTION].
Press [
,
] to select “Properties” and press [OK].
e r
ꢁTo exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
1
2
3
4
Press [DISPLAY].
Repeat Play
Random
Press [
Press [
Press [
,
] to select “Play” and press [ ].
e r
q
,
] to select “Repeat Play” or “Random” and press [ ].
] to select the item.
e r
q
,
e r
ꢁRepeat Play
“All”: Repeatedly playback the selected album, etc.
“Track”: Repeatedly playback the selected track
“Off”
ꢁRandom
“On”: Randomly playback the selected album, etc.
“Off”
This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding higher frequency signals not recorded on the track.
Re-master
1
2
3
4
Press [DISPLAY].
Press [
Press [
Press [
,
] to select “Sound” and press [ ].
e r
q
,
] to select “Sound Effects” and press [ ].
] to select “Re-master1” or “Re-master2”.
e r
q
,
e r
ꢁThis function is effective for audio from the HDMI terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal only when “Dolby
Digital”, “DTS”, “MPEG” or “HE-AAC” is set to “PCM”. (However, in this case, audio is output as 2 ch from the
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.)
Sample pictures in this unit or pictures stored on “Album View” of the HDD can be played back as slideshow during
playback of the music.
Display Still
Pictures
(Slideshow)
While playing the music
Press the “Red” button.
Select Picture Album
Change the pictures to display
Please select the album to start slideshow.
1
2
3
Press [OPTION].
Sample Pictures
My Favourites
My Travel
Press [
Press [
,
] to select “Select Picture Album” and press [OK].
] to select the album and press [OK].
e r
,
e r
While playing music a picture slideshow
can be displayed.
OK
RETURN
To end the slideshow
Press [RETURN ].
ꢁIt will also end when the music is stopped.
When the unit is connected to a Panasonic TV (VIERA) that supports HDAVI Control 2 or later and the unit is
turned off if the power to the television is turned off, since “Power off link” (➡ 74) operates.
The following operations make it possible to keep the power of the unit ON and to play music continuously.
Playing music
continuously
even after turning
off power to the
television
1 While playing music
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [ ] to select “TV Power Off” and press [OK].
,
e r
ꢁSound may be discontinued for several seconds when the power to the television is turned off.
ꢁIf the operation mentioned above is executed while audio is output from the television, the sound may not be
output from the amplifier/receiver. It is recommended to set the amplifier/receiver beforehand so that audio will be
output from the amplifier/receiver.
RQT9487
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing music/playlist
Editing music
HDD
Album and track operation
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ left)
Delete all tracks in the HDD.
Preparation
Delete All Tracks
ꢁWhile displaying Music
Menu screen
1 Press [
,
] to select “Yes” and
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
w q
press [OK].
2 Press [
,
] to select “Delete”
w q
and press [OK].
1
While stopped
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button
to select “MUSIC”.
ꢁOnce deleted, the recorded
contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
ꢁWhen doing “Delete All Tracks”, “Clear My Favourites” or
“Clear Frequently Played” (➡ go to step 3)
All tracks in the selected Artist or
Album are deleted in case of “Delete
All Tracks” or “Delete Album”.
Delete All Tracks
ꢁWhile displaying “Artists”
screen
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Music Menu
MUSIC
VIDEO PICTURE
Total Tracks 53
Press [ ] to select “Delete” and
,
w q
Delete Album
ꢁWhile displaying
“Albums” screen
press [OK].
Artists
ꢁOnce deleted, the recorded
contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
Albums
My Favourites
Playlists
Delete
Frequently Played
Random Play
(➡ 72, Entering text)
Edit Album Name
Edit Track Name
Edit Artist Name
Clear My
OPTION
VIDEO
Please select to access music.
PICTURE MUSIC
OK
RETURN
2 Press [ , ] to select item and press
e r
Remove all tracks in “My Favourites”.
Tracks themselves are not deleted
from the HDD.
[OK].
Favourites
ꢁWhile displaying Music
Menu screen
■ When “Artists” is selected
Press [ ] to select “Clear” and
,
w q
1 Press [
2 Press [
[OK].
,
] to select the initial of the artist.
press [OK].
w q
,
e r
] to select the name of the artist, and press
Remove all tracks in “Frequently
Played”. Tracks themselves are not
deleted from the HDD.
Clear Frequently
Played
3 Press [
,
] to select the album.
ꢁTo edit the track, press [OK], and select the track with
].
e r
ꢁWhile displaying Music
Menu screen
Press [ ] to select “Clear” and
,
w q
[
,
e r
press [OK].
■ When “Albums” is selected
w q
Selected track is removed. Track itself
is not deleted from the HDD.
Remove
ꢁWhile displaying “My
Favourites” or
“Frequently Played”
screen
1 Press [
,
,
] to select the initial of the album.
] to select the album.
2 Press [
e r
Press [
,
] to select “Remove”
w q
and press [OK].
ꢁTo edit the track, press [OK], and select the track with
].
[
,
e r
3 Press [OPTION].
4 Press [ , ] to select item and press
e r
[OK].
e.g., while selecting album
Delete Album
(➡ 69)
Album and track operation (➡ right)
Add to Playlist
Edit Album Name
e.g., while selecting artist
Delete All Tracks
Edit Artist Name
Album and track operation (➡ right)
e.g., while selecting track
Delete
(➡ 69)
Add to Playlist
Edit Track Name
Edit Artist Name
Properties
Album and track operation (➡ right)
(➡ 67)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9487
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Register track to Playlist
HDD
Editing Playlist
HDD
You can register your favourite albums and tracks into 10 preset
playlists.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
ꢁName of the playlist can be changed.
ꢁNew playlist cannot be added.
ꢁUp to 999 tracks can be registered to each playlist.
1
While stopped
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1
While stopped
2 Press [ , ] to select “Playlists” and
e r
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button
to select “MUSIC”.
press [OK].
3 Edit the track in the playlist
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Music Menu
1 Press [ , ] to select the playlist and press
e r
HDD
MUSIC
VIDEO PICTURE
Total Tracks 53
[OK].
Artists
2 Press [ , ] to select the track and press
e r
Albums
[OPTION].
My Favourites
Playlists
e.g., while selecting the track in playlist
Frequently Played
(➡ below)
Remove
Random Play
OPTION
VIDEO
Please select to access music.
PICTURE MUSIC
(➡ left)
Add to Playlist
OK
RETURN
Edit Track Name
Edit Artist Name
Properties
(➡ 68)
2 Press [ , ] to select item and press
e r
[OK].
(➡ 67)
■ When “Artists” is selected
1 Press [
2 Press [
[OK].
,
] to select the initial of the artist.
w q
Edit the playlist
,
e r
] to select the name of the artist, and press
Press [ , ] to select the playlist and press
e r
3 Press [
,
] to select the album.
[OPTION].
e.g., while selecting playlist
e r
ꢁTo register the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[
,
e r
].
Remove All Tracks
■ When “Albums” is selected
w q
(➡ below)
Edit Playlist Name
1 Press [
,
] to select the initial of the album.
] to select the album.
2 Press [
,
e r
ꢁTo register the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[
,
e r
].
4 Press [ , ] to select item and press
e r
3 Press [OPTION].
[OK].
4 Press [ , ] to select “Add to
e r
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Playlist” and press [OK].
To exit the screen
5 Press [ , ] to select the playlist to
e r
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
register, and press [OK].
Playlist operation
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ above, Editing Playlist)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Playlists
Playlist Name
My Favourites
Remove all tracks in the selected
playlist. Tracks themselves are not
deleted from the HDD.
Playlist 01
Playlist 02
Playlist 03
Playlist 04
Playlist 05
Playlist 06
Playlist 07
Remove All Tracks
Playlist 08
Playlist 09
Press [
,
] to select “Remove”
w q
and press [OK].
Please select playlist to add to.
OK
RETURN
Selected track is removed. Track itself
is not deleted from the HDD.
Remove
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Press [
,
] to select “Remove”
w q
and press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
(➡ 72, Entering text)
Edit Playlist Name
RQT9487
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying music to HDD
You can store the two formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.
1
While stopped
Music CD (CD-DA)
Insert a disc or USB memory.
When inserting music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal
Gracenote® Database to obtain title information. The album name,
track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you
find the track easily when playing back.
CD
(Music CD)
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database and
searches for the title information.
MP3
P O W E R E D B Y
You can copy MP3 files from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD or USB
memory.
The track name and artist name will be displayed on this unit if the
information is contained in ID3 tag of the MP3 file.
About the Gracenote® Database
The Gracenote® Database is a database used to search and
retrieve music CD title information.
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [
,
e r
] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
When a music CD is inserted, the unit will automatically search for
and obtain information about the inserted music CD.
The Gracenote® Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so titles
and artist information can be obtained. This unit has an internal
database containing information for approximately 350,000 album
titles.
If the title of the newly released music CD is not in the built-in
database, it is possible to acquire the title automatically by
connecting to the network via the Internet. (➡ 98)
-R -R DL CD USB
(MP3)
The menu is automatically displayed.
Press [
[OK].
,
e r
] to select “Play/Copy Music (MP3)” and press
-R -R DL CD
ꢁ
(MP3) It will go to step 2 automatically if it is
only MP3 that is recorded.
CD
e.g.,
(MP3)
If there are music CDs with very similar title information, then the
incorrect title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions
are found, it is displayed as “Unknown Artist”, “Unknown Album”.
In these cases, enter the music CD title information manually, after
recording to the HDD has completed.
CD
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play/Copy Music ( MP3 )
Select file type.
OK
RETURN
Copying music from a disc or a USB
memory
USB
e.g.,
USB device
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
-R -R DL CD USB
HDD
p
CD
ꢁ
ꢁ
(Music CD): All tracks in the CD will be recorded.
-R -R DL CD USB
(MP3) : All tracks in the folder will be recorded.
(Cannot record track-by-track.)
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
ꢁIt will be recorded as 1 album to the HDD in 1 recording.
ꢁAudio quality
CD
(Music CD): LPCM,
ꢁDisplay items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
-R -R DL CD USB
(MP3): MP3
ꢁThe maximum number of tracks on HDD: 40000
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that
can be recorded will be reduced.
2 Press the “Blue” button.
CD
e.g.,
(Music CD)
0.09
4.30
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
CD
Music List
March Moon
Does this flower open?
No.
Track Name
March Moon
Artist
Leon I
Playing track
01
02
03
04
05
Does this flower open? Leon I
Go there from here
Good by SAKURA
If eastern wind has gone
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Slideshow
Retry access
Copy All
to HDD
3 Press [ , ] to select “Copy” and
w q
press [OK].
Recording starts.
To return to the previous screen in steps 1 to 3
Press [RETURN ].
To stop recording after step 3
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
Note
ꢁWhile recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer
recordings will not proceed.
ꢁTracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc, USB
memory or SD card.
ꢁCDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)
restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.
RQT9487
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD
Deleting music
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
e r
press [OK].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
DELETE Navigator
HDD
Music Menu
Total Tracks 53
MUSIC
VIDEO PICTURE
Artists
Albums
My Favourites
Playlists
Frequently Played
OPTION
VIDEO
Please select to access music.
PICTURE MUSIC
OK
RETURN
3 Deleting an artist/album (music)
1 Press [ , ] to select “Artists” or “Albums”
e r
and press [OK].
2 Press [ ,
,
,
e r w q
] to select the item and
press [DEL].
Deleting a track
1 Press [ , ] to select “Artists” or “Albums”
e r
and press [OK].
2 Press [ ,
,
e r w q
,
] to select the item and
press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select the track and press
e r
[OK].
By using the properties in the option menu, you can confirm
the item that you have selected. (➡ 68, step 3)
Removing the music
1 Press [ , ] to select “My Favourites”,
e r
“Playlists” or “Frequently Played” and
press [OK].
2 Press [ , ] to select the track and press
e r
[OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Remove” and press
w q
[OK].
y Remove is executed. (There is no need to proceed to
step 4.)
y Track itself is not deleted from the HDD.
4 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
w q
press [OK].
The item is deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9487
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering text
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW SD
2 Press [ , , , ] to select a
e r w q
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
character and press [OK].
The maximum number of characters:
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
ꢁTo delete a character
HDD RAM
Characters
64 (44ꢂ)
HDD RAM
Title (
)
Press [
,
,
,
] to select the character in the name field
e r w q
HDD RAM
Album of still pictures (
)
36
and press [ ]. (The selected characters are deleted.)
h
ꢁUsing the numbered buttons to enter characters
HDD
Album (Music) (
)
59
e.g., entering the letter “R”
HDD
HDD
Track (
Artist (
)
)
59
5
6
J
M
P
T
K
N
Q
U
L
O
R
V
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.
3 Press [OK].
39
7
7
HDD
Playlist (Music) (
)
59
7
RAM
Disc (
)
64
7
8
ꢂ
HDD
Title name for timer recording (
)
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
Characters
3 Press [ ] (Set).
g
Title
Disc
44
40
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view
screen and so on.
SD
Characters
36
To end partway
Press [RETURN ].
Text is not added.
Album of still pictures
Note
Enter Title Name
Chapter 1_
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
_
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
+
/
9
0
Top Menu Preview
Chapter 1
1 Show Enter Title Name screen.
–
=
*
%
HDD
Title (timer recording) (
)
i
#
$
&
Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 23.
Title
For your reference
Select “Enter Title Name” in step 4 on page 42.
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalisation or creating Top Menu (➡ 82). When entering a title
name, the name that will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed
in “Top Menu Preview” window.
Disc
Select “Disc Name” in step 1 of “Providing a name for a
disc” on page 80.
HDD RAM SD
Album of still pictures (
)
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 3 of “Editing still
pictures (JPEG)” on page 60.
HDD
Album (Music) (
)
Select “Edit Album Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 68.
HDD
Track (
)
Select “Edit Track Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 68.
HDD
Artist (
)
Select “Edit Artist Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 68.
HDD
Playlist (Music) (
)
Select “Edit Playlist Name” in step 4 of “Editing Playlist” on
page 69.
-R
e.g., Entering a title name for a title on
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Enter Title Name
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
+
/
9
–
=
$
0
Top Menu Preview
*
d
g
j
%
h
k
i
#
<
[
&
@
_
Delete
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
>
]
g
Set
m
n
o
M
P
T
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
(
)
-
v
}
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
\
^
`
0
OK
0
9
– –
SPACE
RETURN
RQT9487
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying VIERA CASTTM
You can access a selection of Internet services from the Home
screen with VIERA CAST, for example, YouTube, Picasa Web
Albums. (Current as of June 2009)
ꢁVIERA CAST requires a broadband Internet connection. Dial-up
Internet connections cannot be used.
Note
ꢁVIERA CASTTM Home screen is subject to change without notice.
ꢁThe services through VIERA CASTTM are operated by their respective
service providers, and service may be discontinued either temporarily
or permanently without notice.Therefore, Panasonic will make no
warranty for the content or the continuity of the services.
ꢁAll features of websites or content of the service may not be available.
ꢁSome content may be inappropriate for some viewers.
ꢁSome content may only be available for specific countries and may
be presented in specific languages.
Preparation
ꢁNetwork connection (➡ 98)
ꢁNetwork setting (➡ 92)
1 Press [VIERA CAST].
Message is displayed. Please read these instructions
ꢁDepending on the usage conditions, it may take a while to read all
the data.
carefully and then press [OK] to start VIERA CAST function.
ꢁThe connection to the Internet may take time or the Internet may
not be connected depending on the connection environment.
ꢁThe unit is connected to the Internet when VIERA CAST is used,
generating communication charges.
Welcome to Network Service
Your Panasonic Network Service allows you to access web-based content on your Player/Recorder.
Network Service is subject to change without notice. The Service through Network Service is operated
by their respective service providers, and service may be discontinued either temporarily or
permanently without notice. Therefore, Panasonic will make no warranty for the content or the
continuity of the services. All features of websites or content of the service may not be available. Some
content may be inappropriate for some viewers and may only be available for specific countries and
may be presented in specific languages. You may disable the Network Service feature by following the
instructions found in your Operating Instructions.
ꢁIf timer recording starts, VIERA CAST will stop.
It's recommended your player/recorder is connected to Full HD display with HDMI. The display of the
contents may be truncated, depending on your TV. You may reduce to screen size by following the
instructions found in your Operating Instructions.
Don’t show this message again
ENTER
Images are for illustration purpose, message may
change without notice.
2 Press [ , , , ] to select the item
e r w q
and press [OK].
ꢁ
You can operate VIERA CAST using the following buttons on
the unit’s remote control. [e, r, w, q], [OK], [RETURN ],
coloured buttons and numbered buttons
ꢁTo access more features on YouTube or Picasa Web Albums
site, enter your user ID and password that you have
previously set up with these sites through the Internet on
your PC. However, not all features may be accessible
through VIERA CAST.
VIERA CAST Home screen;
After you access YouTube or
Settings
Picasa Web Albums from the
VIERA CAST Home screen
and add your favourite videos
or albums to VIERA CAST,
you can choose them easily
from the Home screen.
Panasonic Select
Featured Videos
Images are for illustration and change without notice.
Regarding “Settings”
Set VIERA CAST Home screen.
ꢁMy Account: You can remove your account from the unit.
ꢁLock:
Enter a password to lock YouTube and Picasa Web
Albums.
ꢁNotices
To return to VIERA CAST Home screen
Press [VIERA CAST].
To exit
Press [EXIT].
ꢁSet “Network Lock” to “On” to restrict using VIERA CAST. (➡ 89)
ꢁSet “Automatic Volume Control” to “Off” when the audio is warped
while using VIERA CAST. (➡ 93)
ꢁWhen display of the contents is truncated, set “Picture Zoom” to
“Out”. (➡ 93)
ꢁSet “Daylight Saving Time” when wrong time is displayed on the
screen. (➡ 90)
RQT9487
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using “HDAVI Control”.
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or
receiver under “HDAVI Control”.You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating
instructions for connected equipment for operational details.
ꢁVIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC
(Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’
equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.
ꢁThis unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
“HDAVI Control 4” is the newest standard (current as of December, 2008) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This
standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.
ꢁPlease refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’ equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
Preparation
1
2
3
Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable (➡ 17) or to your receiver using an HDMI cable (➡ 96).
Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (➡ 89). (The default setting is “On”.)
Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment (e.g., TV).
ꢁSet the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be used as “HDAVI Control”.
Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI Control”
function works properly.
4
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.
What you can do with “HDAVI Control”
Download from TVꢂ1
When you connect the unit to a TV for the first time, the station list data is automatically copied from the TV to the unit and the TV stations are
assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as on the TV (➡ 18).
Easy playback
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode and the TV
displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]ꢂ2, [ ] (PLAY)ꢂ3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
q
Power on link
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]ꢂ2, [ ] (PLAY)ꢂ3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
q
DVD-V CD
ꢁ
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
Power off link
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically set to standby mode even
if the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed, during playback or when the unit set to a timer recording.
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when recording, copying, finalising etc.
ꢁWhen this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn off.
About the Standby Power Save functionꢂ4
Even with “Power Save” set to “Off” (➡ 90), this unit turns to “Power Save” states (➡ 18) when Power off link works, so it is possible to reduce
the power consumption while this unit is in standby mode.
ꢁ“Standby Power Save” setting is required to be activated on the TV.
ꢁWhen turning this unit on or off without using Power off link function, this unit will not turn to “Power Save” states.
Direct TV Recordingꢂ1
This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV.
ꢁDepending on the TV type connected with this unit, this function may not work if you select the TV channels on this unit.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operation.
ꢁThe titles are recorded to HDD.
To stop recording
Press [ ].
g
Playing music continuously even after turning off power to the televisionꢂ5
(➡ 67, Playing music continuously even after turning off power to the television)
ꢂ1 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.
ꢂ2 This button is available only when this unit is on.
ꢂ3 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents
from where playback started.
In this case, press [
] or [
] to go back to where playback started.
u
t
ꢂ4 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 4”.
ꢂ5 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later.
Note
ꢁThese functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.
ꢁAbout “HDAVI Control” function, read the instructions of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
RQT9487
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy control only with VIERA remote control
If you connect this unit to the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions.
You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.
Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
y The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.
Using the FUNCTION MENU window to operate this unitÚ1
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window using the TV remote control.
y If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote control, and press [OK].
About the FUNCTION MENU window (➡ 13, 79).
Pause Live TV programmeÚ2
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to
briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
1 When you want to pause the TV programme
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.
y This unit turns on automatically.
2 When you want to resume
Display the Control Panel (➡ below) and press [OK].
y The TV programme resumes.
To stop Pause Live TV
1 Press [ ] while the Control Panel is displayed.
r
2 Press [
,
w q
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Refer to “Note” on page 79, “To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV”.
Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unitÚ1
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using “Control Panel” (➡ below).
1 Press [OPTION].
Control Panel
FUNCTION MENU
Aspect
Control Panel is displayed (➡ below).
FUNCTION MENU window is displayed (➡ above).
Switch the screen mode (➡ 78).
e.g.,
Control Panel
FUNCTION MENU
Aspect
Play Menu
Play menu is displayed (➡ 77).
Top Menu
Top menu is displayed (➡ 21).
Play Menu
Top Menu
Menu
DVD-V
DVD-V
Menu
Menu is displayed.
Select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
Rotate the still picture (➡ 59).
Drive Select
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
Rotate RIGHT (JPEG)
Rotate LEFT (JPEG)
Zoom in (JPEG)
Zoom out (JPEG)
TV Power Off
Note
Enlarge or shrink the still picture (➡ 59).
You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu for
DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD-Video is being
copied.
2 Select an item then press [OK].
Play music continuously even after turning off power
to the television (➡ 67).
■ Using the Control Panel
Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control.
Select “Control Panel” and press [OK] in step 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit” (➡ above).
The Control Panel is displayed (➡ right).
Control Panel
h
y When playing a title, etc.
–[ ]: Pause, [ ]: Stop, [ ]: Search backward, [ ]: Search forward, [OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.
e
r
w
q
Exit
y While playing still pictures
–[ ]: Stop, [ ]: View previous picture, [ ]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.
t
q
y
r
w
q
g
Ú1 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later.
Ú2 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.
■ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode
Press [ ] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.
^
■ When not using “HDAVI Control”
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (➡ 89).
RQT9487
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient functions to playback and viewing
Audio attribute
Using on-screen menus
Signal type
LPCM/ Digital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Common procedures
ch (channel):
Number of channels
Language
1 Press [DISPLAY].
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
DAN: Danish
THA: Thai
Disc
Digital 2/0 ch
1
Soundtrack
POR: Portuguese POL: Polish
Play
Off
RUS: Russian
JPN: Japanese
CES: Czech
SLK: Slovak
HUN: Hungarian
Subtitles
Picture
ITA:
Italian
L R
Audio channel
Sound
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
CHI:
Chinese
KOR: Korean
MAL: Malay
FIN:
ꢅ:
Finnish
Others
Setting
Menu
Item
ꢁDepending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
VIE:
Vietnamese
ꢁThe menu is not displayed when playing still pictures.
2 Press [ , ] to select the menu and
e r
press [ ].
q
3 Press [ , ] to select the item and
e r
press [ ].
q
4 Press [ , ] to select the setting.
e r
ꢁSome items can be changed by pressing [OK].
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
AVCHD
Video
The video recording method appears.
Soundtrackꢂ
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R
+R DL +RW -RW(VR)
The disc’s audio attributes appear (➡ right, Audio attribute),
except the title in DR mode and the title copied from high
definition video (AVCHD format) on HDD.
DVD-V AVCHD
Select the audio and language (➡ right, Audio attribute,
Language).
DivX
Select the soundtrack number.
Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only
one audio type.
Subtitlesꢂ
DVD-V AVCHD
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ right,
Language).
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R
+R DL +RW -RW(VR)
(Only discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off, except the title in DR mode and the
title copied from high definition video (AVCHD format) on HDD.
ꢁSubtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select “Text” or the subtitle number.
ꢁ“Text” or Subtitle number is displayed even if there are not
multiple subtitles.
HDD
Audio Selection
(titles recorded in DR mode, or copied
from high definition video (AVCHD format))
Switch in the case of multiple audio.
HDD
Subtitle Language
(titles recorded in DR mode, or copied
from high definition video (AVCHD format))
Select the subtitle language in the case of multiple languages.
Angleꢂ
DVD-V +R +R DL +RW
Change the number to select an angle.
HDD
Audio channel
(titles in recording mode other than
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) -RW(VR)
DR)
and DivX
(➡ 37, Changing audio during play)
ꢂ
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using
the menus (➡ 21) on the disc.
RQT9487
ꢁThe display changes according to the disc content.You cannot
change when there is no recording.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Play menu—Change the play sequence
Sound menu—Change the sound quality
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
Sound Effects
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
+RW DVD-V -RW(VR) CD AVCHD
Repeat Play
ꢁRe-master1
ꢁRe-master2
Items displayed depends on the contents of the playback.
(Discs recorded at 48 kHz or less)
This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding higher
frequency signals not recorded on the track.
ꢁAll
ꢁTitle
ꢁChapter
ꢁPlaylist
ꢁThis function is effective for audio from the HDMI terminal
or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal only when “Dolby
Digital”, “DTS”, “MPEG” or “HE-AAC” is set to “PCM”.
(However, in this case, audio is output as 2 ch from the
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.)
Select “Off” to cancel.
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
Dialogue Enhancer
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
+RW DVD-V -RW(VR) AVCHD
Mode
Select the picture quality mode during play.
(3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
ꢁNormal:
ꢁSoft:
Default setting
Soft picture with fewer video artifacts
Details are sharper
Mellows movies, enhances detail in dark
scenes. (This does not affect the titles in DR
mode.)
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
ꢁFine:
ꢁCinema:
HD optimizer
It will compensate the mosaic noise in the video and haze
around the characters precisely.
Progressiveꢂ(➡ 114)
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (➡ 114, Film and video).
ꢁAuto:
ꢁVideo:
ꢁFilm:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
Select this if the edges
of the film content
appear jagged or rough
when “Auto” is selected.
However, if the video
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration
to the right, then select
“Auto”.
ꢂ
It will work when “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup menu is “Off”
(➡ 89), “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu is
DVD-V
“576p/480p” (➡ 89) and playing
.
RQT9487
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient functions to playback and viewing
Status messages
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen
When black bars are shown at the top, bottom, left, and right sides
Press [STATUS ].
of the screen, you can enlarge the image to fill the screen.
The display changes each time you press the button.
1 Press [OPTION].
A
2 Press [ , ] to select “Aspect” and
e r
press [OK].
B
3 Press [ , ] to select the item.
w q
C
ꢁNormal:
When watching the TV programme
Normal output
ꢁSide cut:
A
HDD
The black bars on the right and left sides of the 16:9 image
disappear and the image is enlarged. Please note that the
right and left sides of the image are cut off when the black
bar is not displayed.
The remaining time and recording mode
30:27 DR
001 TV ONE
All DVB Channels
10:30
1 TV ONE
C
Coronation street
9:00 - 11:00
Select Favourites
For info press
Now
Rating:PG
Digital channel information (➡ 20)
When recording the TV programme
Display as frame
on the 4:3 aspect
ratio TV screenꢂ
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with Side
cut
Selected drive status/Type of disc or USB
16:9 image with
black bars on
the right and left
A
HDD
REC1
memory
Recording status
Channel/The name of the station
001 TV ONE
Recording in background (When recording
2 programmes simultaneously)/Copy
progress indicator
002 TV2 REC 2
Title number and elapsed time during play/
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with Side
cut
Displayed with black
bars on right and left
on the 16:9 aspect
ratio TV screen
B
Recording mode
Date and time
Available recording time and
recording mode
18:53:50 11.11.2009
ꢂ
Only when “TV Aspect” (➡ 88) is set to “Letterbox”.
■
Title number and
elapsed time
during recording/
Recording mode
Remain
HDD 30:53 DR
■
T1 0:05.14 XP
1
T2 0:10.10 DR
T3 0:00.10 DR
0:35.32
ꢁZoom:
2
The black bars on the top and bottom sides of the 4:3 image
disappear and the image is enlarged. Please note that the
top and bottom sides of the image are cut off when the
black bar is not displayed.
Current position
Total time
All DVB Channels
Select Favourites
For info press
10:30
1 TV ONE
Coronation street
9:00 - 11:00
C
Now
Rating:PG
Digital channel information (➡ 20)
When using Pause Live TV
4:3 image with
black bars at the
top and bottom
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with Zoom
Displayed as frame
on the 16:9 aspect
ratio TV screen
A
HDD
PLAY
Play status
4 Press [OK].
Pause Live TV
Note
Current time
B
ꢁThe screen mode is switched to “Normal” in the following
situations:
–when you change channel
18:53:50 11.11.2009
Live 18:53.50
–when you start or end the playback of a title
–when the unit is turned off or on.
Play 18:40.12
DVD-V
ꢁ
“Side cut” does not have any effect.
ꢁWhen “TV Aspect” (➡ 88) is set to “Pan&Scan” or “Letterbox”, the
“Zoom” effect is disabled.
The time when the picture currently displayed
on the television was broadcasted
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9487
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUNCTION MENU window/Pause Live TV
FUNCTION MENU window
To pause the TV programme you are
watching—Pause Live TV
You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s
tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is
useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand. If
you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
disc.
FUNCTION MENU
Preparation
Time Remaining
22:30 DR
ꢁTurn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
Playback
Recording
Delete
ꢁTurn on this unit.
Copy
TV Guide
1 Press [INPUT SELECT] to select “TV”.
Others
OK
RETURN
2 Press [
1 2
CH] to select the channel.
2 Press [ , ] to select an item and
e r
3
When you want to pause the TV programme
press [OK].
Press [ ].
h
ꢁIf you select “Others” and press [OK], the following screen
HDD
PAUSE
appears. Press [
,
e r
] to select an item and press [OK].
Pause Live TV
FUNCTION MENU
Time Remaining
22:30 DR
Playback
Flexible Recording via AV input
DV Automatic Recording
Network
Recording
Delete
Setup
Copy
TV Guide
Others
OK
4
When you want to resume
RETURN
Press [ ] (PLAY).
q
ꢁIf you press [RETURN ], you can return to the previous
screen.
Refer to “Easy access to various functions—FUNCTION
MENU Display” for detailed information. (➡ 13)
ꢁThe programme is saved on the HDD in DR recording
mode.
ꢁProgrammes can be saved temporary up to 8 hours on the
HDD. (This may vary depending on the HDD free space.)
Operation during Pause Live TV
To exit the FUNCTION MENU window
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [
,
].
t y
Search
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
ꢁPress [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
q
Press [ ].
h
Pause
ꢁPress [ ] (PLAY) to restart.
q
Press and hold [ ] (PLAY/×1.3).
q
Quick View
ꢁPress again to return to the normal speed.
While paused, press [
] or [
].
y
t
Slow-
motion
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
ꢁPress [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
q
1 Press [ ].
g
Stop Pause
Live TV
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and
w q
press [OK].
Note
ꢁTemporary save is stopped in following cases.
–When save time exceeds 8 hours
–When there is no HDD free space
–When 2 programmes are recorded simultaneously
ꢁThe Pause Live TV function does not work
–The clock is not set.
–While 2 programmes simultaneous recording
–While watching a programme being recorded
–When DV is selected
–When a radio programme is selected
ꢁWhen this unit is not operated for approximately 10 minutes while
the screen is being displayed the screen saver is displayed [only
when “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (➡ 88)]. To
return to the previous screen, press [RETURN ].
RQT9487
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc and card management
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR) SD
Setting the protection
RAM
Preparation
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD or SD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
Common procedures
1 Press [ , ] to select “Disc
e r
Protection” and press [OK].
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and
e r
[OK].
press [OK].
RAM
e.g.,
DVD Management
DVD-RAM
Files
1
Titles 11
FUNCTION MENU
Time Remaining 4:00 EP Used 0 : 22
DVD-RAM
Time Remaining
4:00 EP
Playback
Playlists
Disc Name
Recording
Delete
DV Automatic Recording
Recording via AV2 input
Network
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Format Disc
On
Copy
DVD Management
Setup
TV Guide
Others
OK
OK
RETURN
RETURN
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-
protected.
3 Press [ , ] to select “DVD
e r
Management” or “Card Management”
and press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
RAM
e.g.,
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
DVD Management
DVD-RAM
Files
1
Titles 11
Time Remaining 4:00 EP Used 0 : 22
Cartridge-protection
Disc Name
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Format Disc
Off
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
PROTECT
OK
RETURN
Providing a name for a disc
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
You can provide a name for each disc.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Preparation
RAM
ꢁ
Release protection (➡ above, Setting the protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
1 Press [ , ] to select “Disc Name”
e r
and press [OK].
(➡ 72, Entering text)
ꢁThe disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
DVD Management
DVD-RAM
Files
1
Titles
1
0
Time Remaining 4:00 EP Used
My favourite
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
ꢁ
ꢁ
With a finalised disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
My favourite
01/02
01
02
Chapter
1
Chapter
2
+RW
The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment after creating top menu.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9487
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting all titles—Delete all titles
Enabling the unit’s recording
function—Format
RAM
RAM -RW(V) +RW -RW(VR)
Preparation
+R +R DL
SD
(New disc only)
ꢁRelease protection (➡ 80, Setting the protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 80, Common procedures)
Preparation
RAM SD
ꢁ
Release protection (➡ 11, 80, Setting the protection).
1 Press [ , ] to select “Delete all
e r
titles” and press [OK].
Note
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or
card even if you have set protection.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
[OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 80, Common procedures)
press [OK].
1 Press [ , ] to select, “Format Disc”
e r
A message appears when finished.
or “Format Card” and press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
To return to the previous screen
[OK].
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
3 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
Press [EXIT].
press [OK].
Note
A message appears when formatting is finished.
Note
ꢁOnce deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
ꢁStill picture data (JPEG) or computer data cannot be deleted.
ꢁDelete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
ꢁFormatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
RAM
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes (
).
ꢁDo not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc or the card unusable.
4 Press [OK].
Note
ꢁWhen a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
-R -R DL CD
ꢁ
ꢁ
Formatting cannot be performed.
-RW(V) -RW(VR)
You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video
format on this unit.
RAM
To stop formatting
Press [RETURN ].
ꢁYou can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9487
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc and card management
ꢁAfter finalising
Selecting the background style—Top
Menu
-R -R DL +R +R DL
–
The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
-RW(V)
–
You can record and edit the disc after formatting
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
(➡ 81) although it becomes play-only after finalising.
The background selected here will be displayed as the DVD-Video
+RW
top menu after finalising or creating Top Menu (
).
ꢁYou cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
ꢁIf you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be
displayed.
ꢁDiscs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 80, Common procedures)
1 Press [ , ] to select “Top Menu” and
e r
press [OK].
2 Press [ , , , ] to select the
e r w q
background and press [OK].
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
+RW
Top Menu List
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a
+RW disc on other equipment.
1
2
3
Display after finalising
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
01
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ left)
before creating top menu.
Title Name
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 80, Common procedures)
ꢁYou can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (➡ 43,
Change Thumbnail)
1 Press [ , ] to select “Create Top
e r
Menu” and press [OK].
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first—Auto-Play Select
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
[OK].
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising or
+RW
creating Top Menu (
).
3 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 80, Common procedures)
press [OK].
Creating Top Menu starts.You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
1 Press [ , ] to select “Auto-Play
e r
Select” and press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Top Menu” or
e r
Note
“Title 1” and press [OK].
ꢁYou can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
Title 1: The disc content is played without displaying the top menu.
To return to the previous screen
Finalising—Finalise
Press [RETURN ].
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
You can play these discs on compatible DVD players by finalising it
on the unit, effectively making it into DVD-Video that complies with
DVD-Video standards. Before finalising, select the background on
the “Top Menu” (➡ above). The menu you create with the unit can
also be used on most DVD players.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 80, Common procedures)
1 Press [ , ] to select “Finalise” and
e r
press [OK].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
[OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
press [OK].
A message appears when finalising is finished.
Note
ꢁYou cannot cancel finalising.
ꢁFinalising takes up to 15 minutes.
-R DL +R DL
(
Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)
ꢁDo not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.
This will render the disc unusable.
4 Press [OK].
Note
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than the time displayed on the confirmation screen
(approximately four times).
RQT9487
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
You can change the unit’s settings using the Setup menu.
y The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
Tuning
■ Favourites Edit
Common procedures
You can create four groups of channels for viewing and recording
easier. Editing these groups does not affect the channel setting
itself.
1
While stopped
y Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the groups
during timer recording standby.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and
e r
Press the “Blue” button to select the group.
press [OK].
Favourites Editor
All DVB Channels
1 TV ONE
Favourites 1
2 TV2
5 Maori Television
6 TVNZ 6
3 Press [ , ] to select “Setup” and
e r
press [OK].
7 TVNZ 7
20 TVNZ SPORT EXTRA
22 Parliament TV
28 Chinese TV
Setup
Tuning
Select Channel
Store
Page Up
CH
Page Down
RETURN
Add
HDD / Disc
Picture
Add all
Select Favourites
Sound
Display
To add channels to a group
Connection
Network Settings
Others
1 Press [
,
] to select the channel in the “All DVB Channels”
e r
column and press the “Green” button.
y Repeat this step to add other channels.
y Press the “Yellow” button to add all the available channels to the
group. (This function is available only when no channels have
been added to the group.)
OK
RETURN
4 Press [ , ] to select the menu and
e r
2 Press [OK] to save the group.
press [OK].
To change the order of channels of a group
q
1 Press [ ]Ú.
5 Press [ , ] to select the item and
e r
2 Press [
,
] to select the channel in the “Favourites” column to
e r
press [OK].
move and press the “Green” button.
3 Press [
,
] to select the new position of the channel and press
e r
y If there are more items, repeat step 5.
the “Green” button.
y Repeat the steps 2–3 to move other channels.
4 Press [OK] to save the group.
6 Press [ , , , ] to select the option
e r w q
and press [OK].
To delete channels on a group
q
y Follow the instruction on the screen if the operation method
is different.
1 Press [ ]Ú.
2 Press [
,
] to select the channel in the “Favourites” column and
e r
press the “Yellow” button.
To return to the previous screen
y Repeat this step to delete other channels.
y Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the
group.
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
3 Press [OK] to save the group.
Deleting a channel from a group does not affect the channel itself.
You can still select the channel from the “All DVB Channels”
group.
To change the name of a group in the “Favourites”
column
q
1 Press [ ]Ú.
2 Press the “Red” button.
y User input screen appears.
3 Press [
,
,
,
] to select a character and press [OK].
e r w q
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
y To delete a character
Press the “Red” button.
4 Press [RETURN ].
Ú
When the station name of the “All DVB Channels” column is
highlighted
■ DVB Channel List
You can set channel list and change the channel number.
1 Press [
2 Press [
,
] to select “DVB Channel List” and press [OK].
] to select the channel.
e r
,
e r
To hide the channel
You can skip it by pressing [1 2 CH] while watching TV programme
on this unit.
(But you can select it by pressing the numbered buttons to enter the
channel number directly.)
3 Press [OK]. The check mark disappears.
y Press [OK] again to cancel.
To change the channel number
3 Press the “Green” button and press the numbered buttons to set
the channel number you want.
4 Press [OK] to confirm it.
Note
y You can confirm the current channel setting. Press the “Red”
button, DVB Manual Tuning screen will appear.
RQT9487
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
■ Auto Tuning
■ DVB Signal Condition
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (➡ 18) fails for some
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.
Realign the aerial if you are receiving a poor signal.
reason.
1 Press [
,
] to select “Auto Tuning” and press [OK].
e r
When the confirmation screen appears
2 Press [ ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
When “DVB Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be
selected:
,
w q
1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.
2 Press [INPUT SELECT] to select “TV”.
3 Display the Setup menu again (➡ 83).
Tuning will start automatically.
y When restarting the auto tuning using the main unit’s buttons
(➡ 110, To reset this unit)
■ Download from TV
Press [
,
] to select “DVB Signal Condition” and press [OK].
e r
You can use “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a
VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 3 or later) compatible TV with an HDMI
cable.
The quality and strength of the signal are shown.
Press [1 2 CH] to select the channel.
DVB Signal Condition
Channel Name
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
No service
1 Press [
,
] to select “Download from TV” and press [OK].
e r
When the confirmation screen appears
2 Press [ ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
0
0
10
10
,
w q
Chan.Up
Chan.Down
RETURN
■ DVB Manual Tuning
You can set channels manually when the Auto Tuninig could not
complete successfully.
Signal Quality
Below 2 (display red):
1 Press [
,
e r
] to select “DVB Manual Tuning” and press [OK].
The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the
pictures and sound.
DVB Manual Tuning
2–5 (display orange):
Physical Channel
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
[CH21]
177.50
New
MHz
10
10
0
0
The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in the
pictures and sound is possible in isolated case.
Over 5 (display green):
No.
Channel Name
Type
Optimum picture and sound quality.
Free TV: 0 Pay TV: 0
Select physical channel
Radio: 0
Searching
Data: 0
Signal Strength
Start tuning
Select offset
RETURN
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%,
“10” means signal strength 100%.
2 Press [
,
,
] to select the channel you want to set.
] to adjust the frequency.
e r
If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.
Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.
y When the signal is weak:
3 Press [
w q
y The frequency rises and falls at equal intervals.
y Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal
quality displays.
[Refer to “DVB Signal Condition” (➡ right) for signal quality and
signal strength.]
–adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
–adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the
Setup menu (➡ left).
–check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
4 Press [OK] to start scan.
The set channel is displayed in the table.
5 Press [EXIT] and press [1 2 CH] to check that applicable
channels have been selected.
■ DVB Preferred Language
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
,
] to select “DVB Preferred Language” and press [OK].
] to select the item.
] to select the language.
e r
,
e r
■ Add New DVB Channels
You can search for newly added terrestrial digital channels to
receive.
,
w q
You can select up to 6 different subtitles and audio tracks to be used
when multi audio and subtitles are received. Select the language.
If the selected language is not available, then the original language
will be selected.
1 Press [
,
] to select “Add New DVB Channels” and press [OK].
e r
The unit starts searching for newly available terrestrial digital
channels. This takes about 3 minutes.
Add New DVB Channels
Multi Audio
Scan
This will take about 3 minutes.
CH Channel Name
21
69
[English]
[Italian]
[Maori]
[Spanish]
[French]
[French]
[German]
[German]
Type
Quality
Subtitles
Free TV: 0 Pay TV: 0
RETURN
Radio: 0
Searching
Data: 0
[English]
[Italian]
[Maori]
[Spanish]
A message is displayed when the search is finished.
“No new channels found” is displayed when no new channels can
be found.
■ New Channel Message
When a new DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you press
[OK], Auto Tuning starts.
2 Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.
1 Press [
2 Press [
,
] to select “New Channel Message”.
] to select “Automatic” or “Off”.
e r
,
w q
[Automatic]
[Off]
The channel messages are not shown.
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
RQT9487
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aspect for Recording
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying in XP, SP, LP,
EP, FR mode.
HDD/Disc
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
[Automatic] The programme will be recorded in the original
aspect used when recording started (including
Settings for Playback
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
when recording started at a commercial, etc.).
Soundtrack
[16:9]
[4:3]
(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Soundtrack
for DVD-Video” is displayed.)
ꢁWhen recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be recorded in the
original aspect ratio.
ꢁIn the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
[English]
[Spanish]
[Original]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
The original language of each disc will be
selected.
-R -R DL -RW(V)
When the recording mode is set to “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
–
[Other ꢅꢅꢅꢅ]ꢂ
–When recording or copying to a +R and +RW.
–When copying to a +R DL
Subtitles
(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Subtitles for
DVD-Video” is displayed.)
Rec for High Speed Copy
You can copy a programme recorded in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR
mode on the HDD from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-
RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using high speed
mode. However, screen size, etc. is restricted (➡ below).
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.
This setting is valid for the following cases:
[Automatic]
If the language selected for “Soundtrack for
DVD-Video” is not available, subtitles of that
language will automatically appear if available
on that disc.
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
[Spanish]
[Other ꢅꢅꢅꢅ]ꢂ
–Recording from an external equipment (including DV
equipment)
–Copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.
Menu
[On]
You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
ꢁThe following restrictions are applied to
recorded titles.
–Recordings are made using the aspect ratio
set in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ above).
–Select the type of audio in advance from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 86).
–You are no longer able to switch the audio
when watching a programme on an input
channel on the TV connected to this unit.
(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Menu for
DVD-Video” is displayed.)
[
,
w q
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
[Spanish]
[Other ꢅꢅꢅꢅ]ꢂ
DVD-Video Ratings
(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Ratings” is
displayed.)
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the
numbered buttons when the PIN setting screen is shown. It will
be the common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings” and “Network
Lock”.
[Off]
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-
speed copy compatible discs).
Do not forget your PIN.
[Maximum]
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
[Normal (Silent)]
The noise generated by this unit is less
than when “Maximum” is selected,
however the time required for copying will
double (approximately).
[8 No Limit]
[1 to 7]
All DVD-Video can be played.
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with
corresponding ratings recorded on them.
[0 Lock All]
Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
HDD Management
ꢁPress and hold [OK] for 3 seconds to show the following
ꢁChanging settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
settings.
[Unlock Recorder]
[Change Level]
[Other ꢅꢅꢅꢅ]
Enter a code (➡ 101) with the numbered buttons. When the
selected language is not available on the disc, the default
language is played. There are discs where you can only switch
the language from the menu screen (➡ 21).
DVD-V
[Change PIN]
[Temporary Unlock]
Delete all titles
Delete all titles in HDD.
ꢂ
ꢁ
Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
Format HDD
Format of the HDD is performed.
Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.
ꢁSome discs start in a certain language despite any changes you
make here.
Settings for Recording
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode
(➡ 29, Recording modes and approximate recording times).
[6 hours]
You can record for 6 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
[8 hours]
You can record for 8 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
ꢁThe sound quality is better when using “6 Hours” than when
using “8 Hours”.
RQT9487
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Picture
Sound
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Dynamic Range Compression
Still Mode
DVD-V
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (➡ 114,
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
Frames and fields).
[On]
[Off]
[Automatic]
Downmix
[Field]
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is
selected. (The picture is coarser.)
Switch the downmix system for playing back multi-channel
surround sound.
[Frame]
Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture
is clearer and finer.)
ꢁWhen “Dolby Digital”, “DTS”, “MPEG” or “HE-AAC” is set to
“Bitstream” or “Bitstream (DTS)”, there are no downmix effects
for the audio output.
ꢁThe audio output will be in “Stereo” during AVCHD playback.
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
[Stereo]
When connected to equipment that does
not support the virtual surround function.
ꢁIt is not valid for titles in DR mode or AVCHD videos.
[Surround encoded] When connected to equipment that
supports the virtual surround function
[On]
The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly.
This does not work when there are several audio
types included on the playlist and when using
Quick View (PLAY×1.3). Additionally, the
positioning of chapter segments may change
slightly.
Bilingual Audio Selection
(Only when recording from DV input)
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:
ꢁCopying to a DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+RW.
[Off]
The points where chapters in playlists change are
played accurately, but the picture may freeze for a
moment.
ꢁ“Rec for High Speed Copy” is enabled. (➡ 85)
ꢁRecording sound in LPCM (➡ 87 “Audio Mode for XP
Recording”).
[M 1]
[M 2]
NTSC Video Output
Select how the NTSC image is output.
ꢁYou cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.
ꢁWhen recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➡ 87).
[NTSC]
[PAL60]
Output as NTSC.
Convert and output as PAL60. Select this when
connected to the PAL format TV.
Digital Audio Output
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.
It will be converted to 48 kHz regardless of the setting in
following cases.
ꢁThe signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz.
ꢁThe disc has copy protection.
[On]
Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when
the connected equipment cannot process signals
with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
[Off]
Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment can process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
RQT9487
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢂ1
Dolby Digital
Audio Channels for HG/HX/HE/HL Recording
This will set the audio when converting the recording mode to
HG, HX, HE or HL, from DR (➡ 44).
ꢂ2
DTS
ꢂ1
MPEG
[5.1-channel]ꢂ
Select to output Dolby Digital, DTS Digital Surround or MPEG
as bitstream or PCM.
Record using 5.1 ch audio.
[2-channel]
Record using 2 ch audio.
Note
ꢂIf the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz, surround audio is
mixed and recorded in front LR channels. Audio will be output
from two front speakers only, even if you play it on 5.1 ch
speaker connection.
ꢁNot making the proper settings may result in noise.
ꢁIf the unit is connected with the HDMI AV OUT terminal, the
specifications of the connected equipment take preference
over this unit and audio selected in these items may not be
output (e.g., when a television is connected, the HDMI audio
output of this unit is limited to down-mixed 2 ch.).
[Bitstream]
Select “Bitstream” when the connected
equipment can decode the respective audio
format.
[PCM]
Select “PCM” when the connected equipment
cannot decode the respective audio format.
Refer to the operating instructions for connected
devices to verify whether or not they can decode
each of the audio formats.
Set the speaker output on the amplifier when
output with PCM.
ꢂ1 The default setting is “PCM”.
ꢂ2 The default setting is “Bitstream”.
HE-AAC
Select to output HE-AAC as bitstream or PCM.
[Bitstream (DTS)] Select “Bitstream (DTS)” when the
connected equipment can decode HE-AAC
format.
[PCM]
Select “PCM” when the connected
equipment cannot decode HE-AAC format.
Set the speaker output on the amplifier
when output with PCM.
Audio Mode for XP Recording
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.
[Dolby Digital] (➡ 114)
[LPCM] (➡ 114)
ꢁThe picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that
of normal XP mode recordings.
ꢁThe audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
ꢁWhen recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio
in advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 86).
Audio Mode for DV Input
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s
DV input terminal (➡ 54).
[Stereo 1]
[Stereo 2]
Records audio (L1, R1).
Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
[Mix]
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
ꢁWhen recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 86).
Audio Mode for Digital Broadcast
Select the initial setting for audio tracks.
[Automatic]
[MPEG]
Automatically selects the audio tracks if
programme has more than two tracks.
The priority is given in the following order -
Dolby Digital Plus, HE-AAC, Dolby Digital,
MPEG.
The priority is given to MPEG as long as the
programme contains MPEG audio.
RQT9487
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Display
Connection
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may
not be able to change the settings.
On-Screen Messages
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information
screen (➡ 20) disappears automatically.
The length of time the control panel (➡ 75) is displayed can also
be changed, but “Off” does not work.
TV Aspect
Set to match the type of television connected.
[16:9]
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.
[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.)
[Pan&Scan]
When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, side picture is trimmed
for 16:9 picture.
The “Pan&Scan” setting may not
work and the pictures may be
shown in the letterbox style
depending on the content.
[3 sec.]
[5 sec.]
[7 sec.]
[10 sec.]
Unit’s Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
(➡ 90) to “On”, and is changed to “Bright” if you set “Power Save”
to “Off”.
[Letterbox]
When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, 16:9 picture is shown
in the letterbox style.
[Bright]
[Dim]
[Automatic] The display turns dark during play and disappears
when the unit is turned off. It reappears
momentarily if a button is pressed. While using this
mode, the standby power consumption can be
reduced.
Aspect for 4:3 Video
To play a 4:3 title, set how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen
television.
[4:3]
Picture output expands left or right.
Screen Saver
This is to prevent burn-in on the screen.
ꢁWhen this is set to “On”, the masked-off area on the screen
becomes grey.
[16:9]
Picture is output as original aspect
with side panels.
[Only when connecting with an HDMI cable or a component
video cable and “HDMI Video Format” (➡ 89) is set to any other
mode than “576p/480p”, or “Component Resolution” (➡ 89) is
set to “720p” or “1080i”]
TV System
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting
with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC
titles on the HDD.
[On]
If there is no operation for a while, the displayed
screen switches to the other states automatically.
–When the DIRECT NAVIGATOR, TV Guide,
Timer recording list, Copying list, DELETE
Navigator or FUNCTION menu is displayed, the
display on the screen is not displayed.
–When Music is played, the display returns to the
screen saver mode. (Playback continues.)
–When still pictures are shown (except for
slideshows), the display returns to the DIRECT
NAVIGATOR screen.
[PAL]
ꢁSelect when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television.
ꢁSelect to record television programmes and PAL
input from other equipment.
ꢁSelect when playing a PAL input title recorded on
the HDD.
[NTSC]
ꢁ
Select when connecting to an NTSC television.
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.
ꢁSelect to record NTSC input from other equipment.
ꢁSelect when playing an NTSC input title recorded
on the HDD.
–The display returns to the screen saver mode
when it is paused by the Pause Live TV. (Pause
status will continue.)
Note
[Off]
ꢁThis unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
ꢁIf “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be
used.
ꢁA disc or title with different “TV System” may not be able to
playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording.
You will be able to playback by changing the “TV System”
settings in that case, but to prevent failure of the timer
recording, change back the settings before the recording starts.
Teletext
Select the Teletext display mode. (➡ 20)
[TOP (FASTEXT)]
[List]
To change the setting all at once (PAL'NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [ ] and [ OPEN/CLOSE] on the
g
;
main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
■ Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for the
type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback
a title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(ꢃ: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)
TV type
Disc/Titles recorded on
HDD
Yes/No
ꢃ
Multi-system
TV
PAL
NTSC
PAL
NTSC
PAL
ꢃ
ꢃ
PAL TV
ꢃꢂ1 (PAL60)
NTSC TV
–
ꢃꢂ2
NTSC
ꢂ1 Select “PAL60” for “NTSC Video Output” in the Setup menu
(➡ 86). If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60
signals the picture will not be shown correctly.
ꢂ2 Select “NTSC” in “TV System”.
ꢁWhen playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or NTSC).
RQT9487
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDMI Connection
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
Network Settings
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
HDMI Video Mode
Select “On” when video is output from HDMI AV OUT terminal.
IP Address/DNS Settings (➡ 92)
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
[On]
Connection Test
[--]
[Off]
When the equipment such as amplifiers is
connected using HDMI cable, and TV is connected
to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal (setup
before connecting to the amplifiers.)
IP Address Auto-assignment
[On]
[Off]
HDMI Video Format
IP Address
[---.---.---.---]
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.
However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it
may be improved by changing the setting.
Subnet Mask
[---.---.---.---]
ꢁTo enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need
to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this
unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it
must also be 1080p compatible.
Gateway Address
[---.---.---.---]
[576p/480p]
DNS-IP Auto-assignment
[720p]
All images other than 720p will be output as
1080i.
[On]
[Off]
[1080i]
Primary DNS
[---.---.---.---]
[1080p]
When outputting 1080p signal, we recommend
using High Speed HDMI Cables that have the
HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are
less than 5.0 meters to prevent video distortion
etc.
Secondary DNS
[---.---.---.---]
[Automatic]
Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080p,
1080i, 720p or 576p/480p).
Connection Speed Auto-configure
[On]
[Off]
ꢁPress and hold [ ] and [ ] (PLAY) for more than 5 seconds
when the image is disturbed by changing the setting. It will be
set to “576p/480p”.
Connection Speed Setting
This is enabled only when “Connection Speed Auto-configure”
is turned “Off”.
g
q
[10BASE half duplex]
[100BASE half duplex]
[10BASE full duplex]
[100BASE full duplex]
HDMI Audio Output
[On]
[Off]
When connected to TV with HDMI cable, and
connected to amplifiers not compatible to HDMI with
the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal
Proxy Server Settings (➡ 93)
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
Initialize
VIERA Link
Set the setting of “Proxy Server Settings” back.
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.
Proxy Address
(The initial setting is blank.)
[On]
Proxy Port Number
(The initial setting is “0”.)
[Off]
Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI
Control”.
Connection Test
[----]
Component Resolution
This sets the video output resolution when using the component
video terminal.
Network Service (➡ 93)
[576i/480i]
[576p/480p]
[720p]
[1080i]
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
ꢁIf it is set to “720p”, images other than “720p” will be output as
“1080i”.
ꢁEven if you select “720p” or “1080i”, the video output resolution
is restricted to “576p/480p” when HD contents recorded on this
unit, DVD-Video discs, DivX recorded at a rate of 50 fields per
second and images via AV1, AV2 or DV input are output from
the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals.
Network Lock
You can restrict using VIERA CAST.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the
numbered buttons when the PIN setting screen is shown. It will
be the common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings” and “Network
Lock”.
Do not forget your PIN.
[On]
[Off]
Changing Settings (When “On” is selected)
[Change PIN]
Automatic Volume Control
[On]
[Off]
Select “Off” when the audio is warped while using
VIERA CAST.
Picture Zoom
[In]
The picture is enlarged.
The picture is reduced.
[Out]
ꢁSelect “Out” when display of the contents is truncated.
RQT9487
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
System Update (➡ 94)
Others
In order to update this unit’s software and to support system
changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically performs
software updates.
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Automatic Standby
Select how long the unit remains on when it is not being used.
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
[2 hours]
[4 hours]
[6 hours]
[Off]
Software Update in Standby
[On]
When you set this unit to standby mode, software
updates are downloaded automatically.
Remote Control
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic
products close together.
[Off]
Software Licence
Information about the software licence is displayed.
[DVD 1]
[DVD 2]
[DVD 3]
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
1 Press [
,
] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or
e r
DivX Registration
“DVD 3”) and press [OK].
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video-
on-Demand (VOD) content (➡ 41).
To change the code on the remote control
2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button
([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.
3 Press [OK].
Initialize
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
■ When the following indicator appears on the
All the settings except for the ratings level and ratings PIN etc.
return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes
are also cancelled.
unit’s display
The unit’s remote control code
[Yes]
[No]
Default Settings
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings,
disc language settings, ratings level, ratings PIN, remote control
code, and network settings etc. return to the factory presets.
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
(➡ step 2).
[Yes]
[No]
Note
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the
main unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(➡ step 2).
Clock
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
Automatic Clock Setting
This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital
broadcasts.
But, if the time is not set correctly, set it to “Off” and perform
“Manual Setting”. (➡ below)
[On]
[Off]
Daylight Saving Time
Select time offset from the standard time for Summer Time.
ꢁNormally select “Automatic”.
ꢁIf there is a gap between displayed time and actual time, set
this function.
[Automatic]
[0 hour]
[+1/2 hour]
[+1 hour]
Manual Setting
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following setting.
Clock
Time
15
Date
1
:
45
:
39
.
8
.
2009
Please set clock manually.
OK: store RETURN: leave
OK
RETURN
1 Press [
,
] to select the item you want to change.
w q
The items change as follows:
Hour
Minute
Second
Day
Month
Year
2 Press [
,
] to change the setting.
e r
3 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
The clock starts.
Power Save
[On]
Power consumption is minimized when the unit is
turned to standby (➡ 111).
[Off]
It is possible to start quickly from standby mode.
ꢁ“Unit’s Display” (➡ 88) is fixed with “Automatic” when “Power
Save” is set to “On”, and is changed to “Bright” when “Power
Save” is set to “Off”.
RQT9487
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Settings
Television operation
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.
2 Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
ꢁRepeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
ꢁIf your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.
1 Point the remote control at the
television.
Note
While pressing [ TV], enter the code
^
ꢁIf your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
01: [0] ➡ [1]
10: [1] ➡ [0]
Child Lock
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
Manufacturer and Code No.
Brand
Panasonic
Code
01/02/03/04 METZ
Brand
Code
05/28
Press and hold [OK]
AIWA
35
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
NEC
05/19/20/47
and [RETURN
]
AKAI
27/30
33
24
36
33
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the
unit’s display.
BEJING
BEKO
05/71/72/73/ NOBLEX
74
BENQ
58/59
NOKIA
25/26/27/60/
61
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
BP
09
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
10
BRANDT
BUSH
10/15
05
45
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] simultaneously until “X
HOLD” disappears.
ONWA
30/39/70
05
CENTREX
CHANGHONG
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
66
ORION
69
PEONY
49/69
41/48/64
05/06/46
05
05
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
64/65
05
05
37/38
52
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FISHER
FUJITSU
FUNAI
05
10/34
61
05
RADIOLA
SABA
05
21
10
53
SALORA
SAMSUNG
26
63/67
32/42/43/65/
68
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
05/50/51
SANSUI
SANYO
05
05
36
09
21/54/55/56
05/29/30
SCHNEIDER
SEG
05/69/75/76/
77/78
HIKONA
HITACHI
52
SELECO
05/25
18
05/22/23/40/ SHARP
41
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
05
30
25
49
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
09
05
08
JINGXING
TCL
31/33/66/67/
69
JVC
17/30/39/70 TELEFUNKEN
10/11/12/
13/14
KDS
52
TEVION
52
KOLIN
KONKA
LG
45
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
52
62
10/15/44
16/57
05
05/50/51
07/46
LOEWE
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE
MAG
52
YAMAHA
18/41
RQT9487
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Settings
These settings are used when you will connect this unit to a network.
The connection to the Internet may take time or the Internet may not
be connected depending on the connection environment. It is
recommended that you use a broadband connection.
■ Setting the DNS-IP
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without
making any changes.
When setting an assigned DNS server from your Internet service
provider, perform the following settings.
■ Testing the connection
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
Always test the connection when a LAN cable is connected or when
new “IP Address/DNS Settings” have been made.
6 Press [ , ] to select “DNS-IP Auto-
e r
assignment” and press [ , ] to select “Off”.
w q
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
7 Press [ , ] to select “Primary DNS” or
e r
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and press [OK].
e r
“Secondary DNS” and press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
e r
8 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
4 Press [ , ] to select “Network Settings” and
e r
press [OK].
press [OK].
ꢁFollow the instructions given by your Internet service provider
and enter the numbers. If the number is unknown, then check
the number of other devices such as personal computers
connected via a LAN cable and assign the same number.
ꢁIf a wrong number is entered, then press [DEL].
5 Press [ , ] to select “IP Address/DNS
e r
Settings” and press [OK].
IP Address / DNS Settings
ConnectionTest
9 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
IP Address Auto-assignment
IP Address
On
Note
ꢁThe numeric input range is between 0 and 255.
Subnet Mask
■ Setting the connection speed
Gateway Address
DNS-IP Auto-assignment
When the connection test results in “Failed” after the IP and DNS-IP
addresses are assigned, perform the following settings.
On
On
Primary DNS
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
Secondary DNS
6 Press [ , ] to select “Connection Speed Auto-
e r
Connection Speed Auto-configure
Connection Speed Setting
configure” and press [ , ] to select “Off”.
w q
MAC Address: 00-0b-97-e6-7a-ae
OK
7 Press [ , ] to select “Connection Speed
e r
Setting” and press [ , ] to select a connection
w q
RETURN
speed.
ꢁSelect a connection speed in accordance with the environment
of the network connected.
6 Press [ , ] to select “Connection Test” and
e r
press [OK].
“Testing”: The test is in progress.
ꢁWhen the settings are changed, the network connection may
be disabled depending on the device.
“OK”:
The connection is completed.
“Failed”: Please check the connection and settings.
Note
ꢁPerform the “Connection Test” also when any change was made to
the “IP Address/DNS Settings”.
ꢁIf the connection test fails, it may be necessary to set the MAC
address of this unit at the router side. The MAC address can be
displayed by selecting “Network Settings” and “IP Address/DNS
Settings” in steps 1-5 (➡ above).
■ Setting the IP address
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without
making any changes.
Set the IP address only when the router has no DHCP server
functions or when the router’s DHCP server function is disabled.
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ above)
6 Press [ , ] to select “IP Address Auto-
e r
assignment” and press [ , ] to select “Off”.
w q
7 Press [ , ] to select “IP Address”, “Subnet
e r
Mask” or “Gateway Address” and press [OK].
8 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
press [OK].
ꢁAfter checking the specifications for your broadband router,
enter each number.
If the number is unknown, then check the number of other
devices such as personal computers connected via a LAN
cable. Assign a different number from those of other devices for
“IP Address” and the same number for others.
ꢁIf a wrong number is entered, then press [DEL].
IP Address
Please input IP Address and press “OK”.
The IP address will be cleared by pressing
“OK” when there is no number input.
192
0
1
.
.
.
-
9
Number
9 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
Note
RQT9487
ꢁThe numeric input range is between 0 and 255.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Setting the proxy server
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without
making any changes.
Please use this setting when instructed to by your Internet service
provider.
ꢁSet the proxy server only after the connection test is completed
properly.
■ Setting the network service (VIERA CAST)
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and press [OK].
e r
3 Press [ , ] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
e r
4 Press [ , ] to select “Network Settings” and
e r
press [OK].
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
5 Press [ , ] to select “Network Service” and
e r
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and press [OK].
e r
press [OK].
Network Service
3 Press [ , ] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
e r
4 Press [ , ] to select “Network Settings” and
e r
Network Lock
Off
press [OK].
Automatic Volume Control On
In
Picture Zoom
5 Press [ , ] to select “Proxy Server Settings”
e r
and press [OK].
Proxy Server Settings
Initialize
Proxy Address
OK
0
Proxy Port Number
Connection Test
RETURN
----
• Network Lock (➔ 89)
• Automatic Volume Control
Select “On”, the volume is controlled by this unit automatically. If
you want to enjoy the original volume, set it to “Off”.
• Picture Zoom
OK
RETURN
Select “In” to enlarge the picture, or select “Out” to reduce the
picture.
6 Press [ , ] to select “Connection Test” and
e r
press [OK].
Proxy Server Settings
Initialize
Proxy Address
0
Proxy Port Number
Connection Test
----
OK
RETURN
“Testing”: The test is in progress.
“OK”:
The connection is completed.
Press [RETURN ] to exit.
“Failed”: Please check the connection and settings.
7 Press [ , ] to select “Proxy Address” and
e r
press [OK].
(➡ 72, Entering text)
After the input of “Proxy Address” is completed
8 Press [ , ] to select “Proxy Port Number” and
e r
press [OK].
9 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
press [OK].
Proxy Port Number
Please input HTTP Proxy Server Port Number
and press “OK”.The number will be set to “0”
by pressing “OK” when there is no number
input.
0
0
-
9
Number
10 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
To set back to default setting
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ above)
1 Press [
,
] to select “Initialize” and press [OK].
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
e r
2 Press [
,
w q
RQT9487
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software (Firmware) Update
Software of this unit can be updated automatically by following
method.
y From broadcasts
y From Internet [network connection and setting is required. (➡ 92,
98)]
Update of the software is done when it is in standby mode.
Once the new software is found, it will start the download of the
software, and then the update.
Download of the software will start automatically when the power of
this unit is turned off or when it is 3 a.m.
y The time it takes to update depends on the connection.
–For Broadcast: About 30 minutes to 1 hour
–For Internet: About 1 hour
(It may take longer than specified above to download because
the download time differs depending on the network
environment. It is recommended to be used in a broadband
environment.)
If you do not want to perform the software update during the
standby mode, set “Software Update in Standby” in the Setup menu
to “Off”. (➡ 90)
■ If a software update is available, a notification is
displayed.
For broadcast
All DVB Channels
10:30
1 TEN HD
Coronation street
9:00 - 11:00
Select Favourites
Software update
Now
Rating:PG
Software update
y Following screen is displayed when “Red” button is pressed.
For Internet
New software version has been found.
The software will be updated automatically
after this unit is switched to standby.
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead.
y Update of the software will start when the power is turned off.
■ The unit’s display during the update
y “SW-DL”
: Software is downloading. Download will stop
when the power is turned on, or the timer
recording starts.
: Update of the software will start once the
download is completed.
y “START”Ú
y “UPD ꢀ/ꢀ”Ú : Software is updating.
y “FINISH”
: Updated of the software has completed.
Ú
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress
may damage the unit.
Note
y If the timer recording is scheduled within the following time at the
start of the download, the download will not be executed.
–For broadcast: Within 1 hour
–For Internet: Within 1 hour
y If downloading on this unit fails or this unit is not connected to the
Internet, then you can download the latest software from the
following website and burn it to a CD-R to update the software.
http://panasonic.net/support/
RQT9487
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
Connecting a television with S VIDEO
terminals
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
ꢁConnect to terminals of the same colour.
Connecting a stereo amplifier
ꢁConnect to terminals of the same colour.
ꢁSupplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).
Amplifier’s rear panel
ꢁSupplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).
AUDIO IN
R
L
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
IN
R
L
IN
Audio cable
S Video
cable
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
Audio cable
This unit’s rear panel
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
DIG
PR
Y
PB
AUOUT
(PCM
ONENT
O OUT
BITEAM)
Connecting an amplifier with a digital
input terminal
Required setting
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 86)
ꢁWhen this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital
audio cable or coaxial cable and connected to a television with an
HDMI cable, you can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the
disc by setting “HDMI Audio Output” to “Off” in the Setup menu
(➡ 89). In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the
television.
This unit’s rear panel
Connecting a television with
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals
Television’s rear panel
COMPONENT
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
R
L
R
P
B
P
Y
ꢁBefore purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
■ With OPTICAL
Component
video cable
Audio cable
ꢁYou cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
OPTICAL IN
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
Amplifier’s rear panel
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
Insert the cable so its
shape fits correctly into
the terminal.
Optical digital audio cable
AUDIVIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
Do not bend sharply when
connecting.
This unit’s rear
panel
DIGITAL
PB
Y
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
BITSTREAM)
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (➡ 114) and provide a purer picture than the S
VIDEO OUT terminal.
This unit’s rear panel
VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
ꢁConnect to terminals of the same colour.
ꢁSupplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).
■ With COAXIAL
Required setting
COAXIAL IN
“Component Resolution” setting in the Setup menu (➡ 89)
Amplifier’s rear panel
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is
progressive compatible. Set “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup menu
to “Off” and “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu to
“576i/480i” if you are concerned about it (➡ 89). This is the same for
multi system televisions using PAL mode.
Coaxial cable
DIGITAL
PB
Y
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
BITSTREAM)
CRT
DO NOT
Progressive output
O-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
This unit
RQT9487
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted.You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
ꢁThis unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM) technology (➡ 114, 115).
ꢁVideo sources converted to 1920×1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
ꢁPlease use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
ꢁWhen outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.
[➡ 74, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control™”)]
ꢁNon-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
ꢁIt is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Television’s rear panel
HDMI IN
HDMI cable
Receiver’s rear
panel
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
Required setting
ꢁSet “HDMI Video Mode” and “HDMI Audio
Output” to “On” (➡ 89).
(The default setting is “On”.)
HDMI cable
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
RF OUT
RF IN
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
HDMI AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
Note
ꢁIf you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 114)
and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
ꢁYou cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
RQT9487
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting an Analogue television and VCR
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
To the aerial
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
1
AC mains lead
(included)
Aerial
cable
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Other connections
16, 95)
6
Audio/video
cable
(included)
(
5
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
RF OUT
RF IN
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
Cooling fan
2
3
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
Audio/video
cable
4
RF coaxial
cable
RF OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
VCR’s rear panel
Connecting a Digital television and VCR
To the aerial
Aerial
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
cable
Splitter
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
Aerial
cable
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
3
1
AC mains lead
(included)
Aerial
cable
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Other connections
6
Audio/video
(
16, 95)
5
cable
(included)
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
RF OUT
RF IN
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
Cooling fan
2
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
Audio/video
cable
4
VCR’s
rear panel
RF OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
Connect the unit directly to the television
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or video cassette
DO NOT
recorder to the television, video signal will be affected by copyright
protection systems and the picture may not be shown correctly.
Television
When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are both
television and VCR input terminals.
VCR
RQT9487
This unit
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
Network connection
Following function will be available when this unit is connected to the network.
y This document is assuming that you already have a broadband connection.
y This connection is not necessary if following functions are not to be used.
You can access a selection of Internet services from the Home screen with VIERA CAST, for example,
YouTube, Picasa Web Albums. (Current as of June 2009) (➡ 73)
y VIERA CAST requires a broadband Internet connection. Dial-up Internet connections cannot be used.
Enjoying VIERA CASTTM
Automatically acquire the title
of the CD
Automatically acquire the title of the CD or the information about the artist. (➡ 70)
Update the software of this
unit
Automatically update the software of this unit. (➡ 94)
y Update of the software can be done from the broadcast too.
Internet
This unit’s rear panel
DIGITAL
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
RF OUT
RF IN
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S
VIDEO
OPTICAL
Straight LAN cable
Hub or broadband router
y When your communication equipment (modem, etc.) has
no broadband router functions: Connect a broadband
router. When your communication equipment (modem, etc.)
has broadband router functions but there are no vacant
ports: Connect a hub.
Telecommunications
equipment (modem, etc.)
y Use a router that supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX.
y Make the necessary settings in “Network Settings” after connecting. (➡ 92)
Note
y Refer to the operating instructions for the connected device.
y It may not work properly depending on the equipment or environment used.
y Depending on the contract with the provider, you may not be able to connect multiple numbers of terminals such as this unit or computers, or
an additional fee might be required.
y Use only category 5 straight LAN cables (STP) when connecting to peripheral devices.
y When operating the VIERA CAST, use high-speed Internet service no less than 1.5 Mbps for SD (Standard Definition) and 6 Mbps for HD
(High Definition) picture quality by your local broadband company.
– If using slow Internet connection, the video may not be displayed correctly.
y Inserting any cable other than a LAN cable in the LAN terminal can damage the unit.
RQT9487
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operations that can be performed simultaneously
Operations that can be performed while recording or copying a title
(ꢃ: Possible, –: Impossible)
Playback of
HDD
Playback of
discs
Playback of still
pictures
Playback of
music recorded
on HDD
ꢃ
ꢃ
ꢃ
ꢃ
ꢃ
While recording to HDD in DR mode
–
–
ꢃꢂ
While recording from external equipment
to HDD (in XP, SP, LP, EP and FR mode)
While recording from DV input
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
While copying in normal speed mode
While copying in high speed mode
[With finalising or creating Top Menu
+RW
(
)]
ꢃ
While copying in high speed mode
–
–
–
[Without finalising or creating Top Menu
+RW
(
)]
AVCHD
ꢂ
It cannot playback.
ꢁSimultaneous operation is not possible while executing “DV Automatic Recording” or “Recording via AV2 input”.
Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation
Starting of timer recording possible during the following
operations
Starting of timer recording not possible during the following
operations
ꢁRecording the titleꢂ1
ꢁCopying a title in normal speed mode
ꢁCopying a title in high speed mode (with finalising or creating Top
ꢁPlaying the titleꢂ2
ꢁEditing the title
ꢁCopying a title in high speed mode (without finalising or creating
Top Menu)
–Only 1 programme can be recorded.
ꢁExecuting “DV Automatic Recording”ꢂ3
ꢁExecuting “Recording via AV2 input”ꢂ3
ꢁExecuting Pause Live TVꢂ1
Menu)
ꢁCopying HD Video (AVCHD format)
ꢁEditing still pictures or music
ꢁCopying still pictures
ꢁCopying music
ꢁFormatting
ꢁFinalising/Creating Top Menu (
+RW
)
ꢂ1 Executing operation will terminate when 2 programmes
simultaneous recording cannot be performed.
ꢂ2 Playback of disc stops when a timer recording mode other than
DR has started.
ꢂ3 Executing operation will be terminated.
RQT9487
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit
operations.
Recording
Can I record from a commercially purchased
video cassette or DVD?
Set up
¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy
Which aerial is suitable for receiving digital
terrestrial broadcasts?
protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.
¾ You can use your current aerial. However, depending on the
area where you live, a new aerial may be necessary. Consult
your local TV aerial installer.
Can the disc recorded with this unit play on other
equipment?
¾ Refer to “Play on other players” in “HDD and disc information”.
(➡ 9)
Can this unit receive or record High Definition
(HD) broadcasts?
¾ Yes, this unit can receive and record High Definition (HD)
Can I high speed copy to a disc?
¾ Yes, you can. (But you may not high speed copy depending on
broadcasts. Record in DR recording mode.
the disc to copy or the title.) (➡ 46)
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.
What do I need to play multi channel surround
sound?
¾ Connect the appropriate amplifier/receiver to the HDMI AV
OUT terminal, the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (OPTICAL,
COAXIAL). (➡ 95, 96)
¾ Title in DR mode on the HDD can be copied to disc at high
speed if the recording mode is converted using “DR File
Conversion” (➡ 44). (But you may not high speed copy
depending on the disc to copy or the title.) (➡ 46)
Is it possible to copy to the disc, SD card or USB
memory after copying HD video (AVCHD format)
to the HDD?
Are the headphones and speakers directly
connected to the unit?
¾ You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through
¾ It can be copied to the disc.
the amplifier etc. (➡ 95, 96)
–It will be copied with SD quality. (It cannot be copied as it is in
HD picture quality.)
¾ It cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory.
My television has S VIDEO IN terminal,
COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals and HDMI IN
terminal. Which should I connect with?
¾ The different levels of picture quality input are listed below in
order from highest to lowest. HDMI IN JCOMPONENT VIDEO
IN JS VIDEO IN JVIDEO IN. However, it will take longer for
the picture output to start up when this unit is connected with
the HDMI IN terminal.
Disc
Can I play DVD-Video bought in another country?
¾ Playback of the following discs is not possible.
–DVD-Video discs that do not include region “4” or “ALL”.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information. (➡ Cover)
Can DVD-Video that does not have a region
number be played?
¾ The region management information for DVD-Video indicates
that the disc conforms to industry standards.You cannot play
discs that do not conform to industry standards or do not have
a region number.
Please tell me about disc compatibility with this
unit.
¾ Refer to “HDD and disc information”. (➡ 6–10)
RQT9487
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide
USB
Is it possible to programme a recording, with a
start and end time that are different from the TV
Guide system?
What can or cannot be done using the USB port
on this unit?
¾ You can play DivX, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB
memory. (➡ 40, 58, 65)
¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to
the HDD. (➡ 62)
¾ You can manually change the start and end time of
programmes in the Timer Recording menu. (➡ 23)
¾ You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD. (➡ 70)
¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the
HDD or DVD-RAM. (➡ 57)
¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy HD Video to the
HDD. (➡ 56)
Can I receive TV Guide system data via a
connected satellite receiver or a Set Top Box?
¾ No, only via the built-in tuner.
¾ Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB
memory.
¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory
cannot be formatted on this unit.
How can I cancel a timer programming?
¾ Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then
press [DEL]. (➡ 34)
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (➡ 11)
What happens when I unplug the unit from the
household mains socket?
Music
¾ The TV Guide data will not be updated.
What will happen if I try to record the same CD
multiple times?
¾ New album will be made following the existing album.
¾ If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for
a longer period of time, the TV Guide data will be lost.
¾ Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work.
Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the
disc or USB memory?
¾ No, you cannot.
Regarding Frequently asked questions for copying (➡ 48)
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
Afar:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Amharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
6566 Catalan:
6565 Chinese:
6570 Corsican:
8381 Croatian:
6577 Czech:
6582 Danish:
7289 Dutch:
6583 English:
6589 Esperanto:
6590 Estonian:
6665 Faroese:
6985 Fiji:
6765 Gujarati:
9072 Hausa:
6779 Hebrew:
7282 Hindi:
6783 Hungarian:
6865 Icelandic:
7876 Indonesian:
6978 Interlingua:
6979 Irish:
7185 Lingala:
7265 Lithuanian:
7387 Macedonian:
7273 Malagasy:
7285 Malay:
7383 Malayalam:
7378 Maltese:
7365 Maori:
7165 Marathi:
7384 Moldavian:
7465 Mongolian:
7487 Nauru:
7578 Nepali:
7583 Norwegian:
7575 Oriya:
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:
7579 Persian:
7585 Polish:
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:
Tamil:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
7684
8277 Tatar:
8279 Telugu:
8285 Thai:
8377 Tibetan:
8365 Tigrinya:
7168 Tonga:
8382 Turkish:
7775 Romanian:
7771 Russian:
7783 Samoan:
7776 Sanskrit:
7784 Scots Gaelic:
7773 Serbian:
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:
6984 Italian:
7779 Shona:
7778 Sindhi:
7865 Singhalese:
7869 Slovak:
7879 Slovenian:
7982 Somali:
8378 Twi:
8368 Ukrainian:
8373 Urdu:
7079 Japanese:
7074 Javanese:
7073 Kannada:
7082 Kashmiri:
7089 Kazakh:
7176 Kirghiz:
7565 Korean:
6869 Kurdish:
6976 Laotian:
7576 Latin:
Basque:
Bengali; Bangla:
Finnish:
8375 Uzbek:
8376 Vietnamese:
8379 Volapük:
6983 Welsh:
8385 Wolof:
8387 Xhosa:
8386 Yiddish:
8476 Yoruba:
8471 Zulu:
6678 French:
6890 Frisian:
6672 Galician:
6682 Georgian:
6671 German:
7789 Greek:
6669 Greenlandic:
7577 Guarani:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian:
Cambodian:
7065 Sundanese:
8076 Swahili:
8084 Swedish:
8065 Tagalog:
8185 Tajik:
7679 Portuguese:
7665 Punjabi:
RQT9487
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages
On the television
Page
41
Authorisation Error.
ꢁYou are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different
registration code.You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)
Cannot finish recording completely.
—
—
28
ꢁThe programme was copy-protected.
ꢁThe HDD or disc may be full.
ꢁThe maximum number of programme has been exceeded.
Cannot play.
Incompatible TV system setting!
88
ꢁYou tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.
Cannot record to the disc.
Cannot format.
15
ꢁThe disc may be dirty or scratched.
Cannot play on this unit.
112
15
ꢁYou tried to play a non-compatible image.
ꢁTurn the unit off and re-insert the USB memory or the SD card.
HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW
Cannot record. Disc is full.
24, 43,
81, 85
ꢁ
Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles. [Even if you
delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is no increase in
disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only
when the last recorded title is deleted.]
Cannot record. Exceeds maximum
number limit of titles allowed.
—
15
ꢁUse a new disc.
No Disc
ꢁThe disc may be upside down.
ꢁThere is no compatible folder in this unit.
No folders.
113
15
No SD CARD
No valid SD card.
ꢁThe card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already
inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
ꢁThe card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.
11
Not enough space in the copy
destination.
24, 43,
61, 64,
68, 71,
81, 85
51, 63
ꢁCreate space by deleting any unnecessary items.
ꢁDelete one or more items registered on the copying list to ensure that “Destination
Capacity” is not exceeded.
The disc is not recordable.
This disc is not formatted properly.
Rental Expired.
—
ꢁThe unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert an unfinalised disc.
ꢁYou inserted an unformatted disc.
81
41
—
ꢁThe DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays.You cannot play it. (DivX)
ꢁSome operations are unsupported by the unit.
This operation cannot be
5
AVCHD
–
:
During playback, reverse slow-motion or reverse frame-by-frame is not possible.
performed now.
—
ꢁDepending on the disc, you may not be able to perform search or skip when film
previews and warning screens are being played back.
This operation is prohibited by
5
this disc.
When removing a recorded disc
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc for play on other equipment.
Finalise
Finalise the disc to enable playback on other
DVD players.
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising.This may take up to min.
Finalise the disc ?
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
This disc cannot be played on other players
without finalising.
■ To finalise the disc
*
Press [ REC] on the main unit.
ꢁYou cannot stop this process once you have started it.
ꢁIf you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a disc name, select “Top Menu” (➡ 82), “Auto-Play Select” (➡ 82) or “Disc
Name” (➡ 80) in “DVD Management” before finalising.
■ To open the tray without disc finalisation
;
Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
RQT9487
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
Page
90
DVD ꢀ
(“ꢀ” stands for a number.)
ꢁThe remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
GUIDE
FINISH
35
94
—
ꢁTV Guide data is being downloaded.
ꢁThe software update is complete.
Hꢀꢀor Fꢀꢀ
(“ꢀ” stands for a service
number.)
ꢁThere is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s
condition.)
ꢁCheck the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the
following.
104–
110
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [ ] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
8
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the
dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.
HARD ERRꢂ
NoERAS
ꢁIf there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
—
—
ꢁYou cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
NoREAD
15
14
ꢁThe disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play or edit.
ꢁThis message may appear when the lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.
;
NoWRIT
—
ꢁYou cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
PLEASE WAITꢂ
ꢁDisplayed when the unit is started and turned off. This is not malfunction.
ꢁThere was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying
out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken.
Wait until the message disappears.
—
—
PROG FULLꢂ
REMOVE
START
ꢁThere are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes.
34
—
94
ꢁThe USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.
ꢁUpdate of the software is started.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
SW-DL
94
81
ꢁSoftware is downloading.
Download will stop when the power is turned on, or the timer recording starts.
UNFORMATꢂ
ꢁYou inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.
UNSUPPORTꢂ
UPD ꢀ/ꢀ
U59
ꢁYou have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.
ꢁYou tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.
9–10
11
94
ꢁThe software is being updated.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
—
ꢁThe unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message
disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear
of the unit.
U61
—
—
ꢁ(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
U72
U73
ꢁThe HDMI connection acts unusually.
–The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
–Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
–The HDMI cable is damaged.
U76
—
ꢁHDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright
protection.
U77
U88
—
ꢁDue to the current disc not having authorised copyright information, video output is not performed.
104
ꢁ(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while
recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
U99
—
ꢁThe unit fails to operate properly. Press [ ] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now
8
press [ ] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
8
X HOLD
91
ꢁThe Child Lock function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears.
ꢂ
The message scrolls on the unit’s display.
RQT9487
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
Updating to the latest software may solve the problem. (➡ 94)
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:
Displays
ꢁRegular disc rotating sounds.
ꢁPoor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
ꢁImage disturbance during search.
ꢁInterruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting
breaks.
The display is dim.
¾ Change “Unit’s Display” in the Setup menu. (➡ 88)
ꢁOperations are slow to respond in power save mode.
ꢁOperations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again
using a Panasonic disc.)
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.
¾ Set the clock. (➡ 90)
ꢁThe unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being
activated. (Press and hold [ ] on the main unit for 3
8
The time recorded on the disc and the available
time shown do not add up.
seconds.)
ꢁWhen the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
The displayed time of this unit is different from
the actual recording time or MP3 recording time.
Power
¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times.
¾ Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted. It
does not increase if other titles are deleted.
¾ Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R
DL, +R or +R DL, there is no increase in disc space.
¾ More disc space than the actual recording time is used after
recording or editing the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200
times or more.
No power.
The unit does not turn on pressing [ ].
^
¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active
household mains socket. (➡ 16, 97)
The unit switches to standby mode.
¾ While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [ ] on the
8
main unit to turn the unit on.
Compared to the actual recorded time, the
elapsed time displayed is less.
The power is turned off automatically.
¾ If you connected this unit to an “HDAVI Control” compatible TV
with an HDMI cable, this unit will be automatically set to
standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode. (➡ 74)
(Only when recording in NTSC)
¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the
number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to
one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour
elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56
seconds). This does not affect the recording.
This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.
¾ If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA)
with the “Intelligent Auto Standby” setting activated on the TV,
when switching the TV input, the unit will be automatically
turned to standby. For details please read the operating
instructions of the TV.
Available disc space display is showing different
from what was used.
¾ Available disc space display may be different from actual.
Varying may be large especially when recorded in DR mode.
“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be
ejected.
¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following
to eject the disc.
1
Press [ ] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
8
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [ ] on
8
the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly
switched to standby.
2
While the unit is off, press and hold [ ] and [CH ] on the
g
1
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the
disc.
RQT9487
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV screen and video
The images from this unit do not appear on the
television.
Picture is distorted.
Television reception worsens after connecting
the unit.
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided between
the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal
booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved
by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
¾ Make sure that the television is connected to the VIDEO OUT
terminal, S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
terminals or HDMI terminal on this unit. (➡ 16, 17, 95–97)
¾ Make sure that the television’s input setting is correct.
¾ Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is
not progressive compatible. Press and hold [ ] and [ /×1.3] on
the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds to
cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used
g
q
The digital channel information or control panel
does not appear.
¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) that “On-Screen
Messages” in the Setup menu will be displayed. (➡ 88)
¾ The digital channel information will not appear during playback.
¾ The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV
with “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (➡ 75)
by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [ ] and
g
[
OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.
;
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (➡ 88)
¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc
that matches with this unit’s TV system.
¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of connected
devices.
Picture does not appear during timer recording.
¾ Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off.
To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn
the unit on.
The picture is distorted during play, or video will
not play correctly.
¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor
Screen size is wrong.
reception or unfavourable weather conditions.
¾ Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does
not have that function, set “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup
menu to “Off” and “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu
to “576i/480i”. (➡ 89)
¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear
briefly between recorded titles in the following situations:
–between titles recorded with different recording modes.
–between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
–between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
–between playlist chapters.
¾
¾
Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu. (➡ 88)
If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to
“16:9” in the Setup menu. (➡ 88)
Pictures do not appear with the HD quality
although HD setting was made.
¾ Even if this unit is connected to a TV through COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT terminals and the Component Resolution is set to
720p or 1080i, the pictures of HD broadcast output from this
unit are output with 576p/480p.
The recorded title is stretched vertically.
¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
-R -R DL -RW(V)
If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode.
–
– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.
– If you recorded in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode with “Aspect for
Recording” set to “4:3” in the Setup menu.
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same
aspect, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set
“Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”. (➡ 85)
– By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a
chance that the recording will be made using the wrong
aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when
recording. (➡ 85)
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer
to your television’s operating instructions.
There is a lot of after-image when playing video.
¾ Set “HD optimizer” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (➡ 77)
When playing DVD-Video using progressive
output, one part of the picture momentarily
appears to be doubled up.
¾ Set “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup menu to “Off” and
“Component Resolution” in the Setup menu to “576i/480i”. This
problem is caused by the editing method or material used on
DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.
(➡ 89)
There is no apparent change in picture quality
when adjusted with the Picture menu in the on-
screen menus.
RQT9487
¾ The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Sound
Operation
No sound.
Cannot operate the television.The remote control
doesn’t work.
¾ Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be
operated even if you change the code. (➡ 91)
¾ The remote control and main unit are using different codes.
Change the code on the remote control. (➡ 90)
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio type.
¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings.
Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected
one. (➡ 16, 17, 86, 95–97)
¾ Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. (➡ 37)
¾ Turn “Sound Effects” in the Sound menu to “Off” in the following
cases. (➡ 77)
number button at the same time for
more than 5 seconds.
¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones. (➡ 3)
¾ You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s
remote control signal sensor during operation. (➡ 3)
¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that
may be subject to sunlight exposure.
¾ Software is updating when “UPD ꢀ/ꢀ” is displaying on the
unit’s display. Wait until the update is completed. (➡ 94)
¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control
again after changing the batteries. (➡ 90)
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects
such as Karaoke discs.
–When playing bilingual broadcast titles.
¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of connected
devices.
¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is
output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT terminal.
¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable,
set “HDMI Audio Output” to “On” in the Setup menu. (➡ 89)
¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be
distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after
changing the batteries. (➡ 91)
¾ The child lock function is activated. (➡ 91)
The unit is on but cannot be operated.
Cannot switch audio.
¾ You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (➡ 87)
¾
Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.
¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
¾
The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
–When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default
setting is “On”). (➡ 85)
Reset the unit as follows:
1
Press [ ] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [ ] on
8
¾ The amplifier is connected using an optical digital audio cable,
a coaxial cable or an HDMI cable.You cannot switch the audio
if “Digital Audio Output” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Digital Audio
Output” to “PCM” or connect using audio cables. (➡ 87, 95)
¾ There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of
how the disc was created.
8
the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly
switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one
minute, then reconnect it.
2
Press [ ] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still
8
cannot be operated, consult the dealer.
Cannot eject disc.
¾ The unit is recording.
¾ The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and
hold [ ] and [CH ] on the main unit at the same time for
g
1
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not
work. Cancel the Child Lock function. (➡ 91)
Cannot tune channels.
Cannot download channel presets from the
television.
¾ Check the connections. (➡ 16, 97)
¾ You must connect to a VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 3 or later)
compatible TV with an HDMI cable to download channel
presets.
Startup is slow.
¾ Make sure that “Power Save” is set to “On”. (➡ 90)
¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
–The clock is not set.
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is
connected.
–When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
RQT9487
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording, timer recording and
copying
The timer programme remains even after
recording finishes.
¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly. (➡ 23)
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
¾ You can not record to the disc by pressing the [ REC].
A part or whole of a recorded title has been lost.
*
¾ You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be
¾ If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the
household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may
be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto. (➡ 8, 9)
RAM -RW(V) +R
¾ The disc is unformatted. Format the disc.
+R DL +RW
(➡ 81)
HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW
You will have to format the disc (
) or
¾ The disc is protected with DVD Management. (➡ 80)
¾ You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the
number of titles has reached its limit. Delete unwanted titles or
use a new disc. (➡ 24, 43, 81, 85)
use a new disc. We cannot offer any guarantee regarding lost
programmes or discs. (➡ 81, 85)
¾ If you use Auto Renewal Recording, the old title will be deleted
after the new title is recorded. (➡ 33)
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
¾
In the following situations,
you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and
then copy. (➡ 24, 43)
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will
copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire
disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode
recording is necessary)
Cannot copy to a disc using the high speed
mode.
¾ High speed copying cannot be performed depending on the
disc or title that is being copied. Refer to “When is high speed
copy not possible?” for details. (➡ 48)
–If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be
copied has exceeded 499
¾ You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you
can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
¾ Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW you may be unable to
record onto or edit them if you either insert and remove the
disc or switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total
of 30 times.
¾ The discs recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other
Panasonic Recorders.
¾ Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be
able to be recorded to.
When copying, it takes a long time even when
high speed mode is selected.
¾ Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if
the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum
speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.
¾ It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
¾ You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6
hours when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not
compatible with EP (8 hours) mode recording.
¾ This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already
have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of
programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another
unit is not guaranteed.
An unusually loud sound is coming from the
rotating disc.
¾ When recording or high speed copying to a disc, the sound of
the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is
not a problem.
¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected.
¾ If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
(Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup
menu (➡ 85).
Cannot record from external equipment.
¾ Check that the connection is correct. (➡ 53, 54, 97)
¾ Select the input channel for the equipment you have
connected.
The quality has dropped when the title in HDD is
copied to the disc.
¾ Titles in HD quality (titles recorded in DR, HG, HX, HE, HL
Cannot record 2 programmes simultaneously.
¾ It cannot in following conditions.
mode or titles in AVCHD) will be copied as SD quality when
–Record 2 programmes from external input
–When performing high speed copying (1 programme can be
recorded to HDD)
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
copied to
.
The DV Automatic Recording function does not
work.
–Recording from DV input, while “Recording via AV2 input”
¾ If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted,
check the connections and DV equipment settings. (➡ 54)
¾ You cannot start recording until the images from the DV
equipment appear on the television.
¾ Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes
on the tape in the DV equipment are not successive.
¾ Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may
not operate properly.
Timer recording does not work properly.
¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme
times overlap (
is displayed). Correct the programme. (➡ 34)
¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer
icon “ ” in the timer recording list is grey.) (➡ 33)
z
¾ Set the clock. (➡ 90)
¾ The programme information in the TV Guide system may not
be correct. It is recommended to modify the start and end times
to allow a margin of a few minutes. (➡ 23)
¾ The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV
tape. (➡ 54)
RQT9487
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Play
The resume play function does not work.
¾ Memorized positions are cancelled when
Play fails to start even when [ ] (PLAY) is
q
–open the disc tray.
pressed.
SD CD USB
turn off the power.
Memorized positions will not be cancelled)
–
HDD
Play starts but then stops immediately.
(
¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (➡ 15)
¾ The disc is dirty. (➡ 15)
¾ You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
(➡ 10)
¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the
equipment used for recording.
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.
Slow-motion playback does not go reverse.
Reverse frame-by-frame does not work properly.
¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 hours)” mode, play
may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with
DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 hours)” mode. (➡ 85)
¾ You cannot playback while executing “Recording via AV2 input”
or when recording from the DV input.
¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages
are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.
¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings
are different from the title recorded on the disc. (➡ 88)
AVCHD
¾ Slow-motion playback in reverse does not work for
.
AVCHD
¾
Reverse frame-by-frame cannot be done.
¾ Frame-by-frame backward for titles that have copied the
AVCHD will be reversed in 10 frame units.
It takes time before play starts.
¾ This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
Audio and video momentarily pause.
¾ This occurs between playlist chapters.
¾ This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles
on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
Picture stops.
¾ Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)
¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
-R DL +R DL
¾
When playing a title recorded on both layers, the
Cannot see the beginning of the title played.
¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI
unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in
the same way as a normal programme. However, video and
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching
layers. (➡ 37)
cable)
When [ ] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you
q
may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the
picture is displayed on the TV. Using [
beginning of the title.
], return to the
u
DVD-Video is not played.
¾ You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change
this setting. (➡ 85)
¾ Ensure the disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number,
and is not defective. (➡ Cover)
Edit
Available disc space does not increase even after
deleting a title.
¾ Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-
Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be
selected.
¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc.
¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the
soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus
to make changes. (➡ 21)
R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL. (➡ 24)
¾ Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is
deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW. The disc
space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.
(➡ 24)
Cannot edit.
¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available
No subtitles.
¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
¾ Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitles” on the on-screen menu to
“On”. (➡ 76)
space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (➡ 24, 43)
Cannot format.
¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
Angle cannot be changed.
¾ Angles can only be changed during scenes where different
(➡ 15)
angles are recorded.
¾ You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in
this unit. (➡ 81)
You have forgotten your ratings PIN.
You want to cancel the ratings level.
Cannot mark the start point or the end point
during “Partial Delete” operation.
¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures.
¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other.You
cannot set an end point before a start point.
¾ The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc
tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive,
then press and hold [ REC] and [ /×1.3] on the main unit at
*
q
the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the
unit’s display).
Cannot create a playlist.
¾ Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit.
Image for the Quick View is not smooth.
¾ Image may not be played back smoothly in case of DR mode
AVCHD
titles or
.
¾ This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
RQT9487
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Still pictures
USB
Cannot display DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.
The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.
¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert
again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on
the unit again.
¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (➡ 15)
¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not
compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory
may be damaged.) (➡ 11)
Cannot edit or format a card.
¾ Release the card’s protection setting. (➡ 11)
¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file
extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (➡ 113)
¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a
USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (➡ 11)
¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB
memory may not be recognized by this unit.
The contents of the card cannot be read.
¾ Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this
does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.
¾ The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents
on the card may be damaged.) This unit is compatible with SD
Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and
FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32
format. (➡ 11)
¾ You can use USB memories with capacities up to 128 GB.
¾ The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that
are not compatible with this unit. (➡ 113)
¾ You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2
GB and SDHC Memory Cards with capacities from 4 GB to 32
GB.
USB memory cannot be operated.
¾ Turn the power of this unit off once, and turn it back on. If it
cannot be operated after that, set “VIERA Link” to “Off”. (➡ 89)
Copying, deleting and setting protection takes a
long time.
TV Guide
The TV Guide System does not receive any data.
¾ Check whether the clock is properly set. (➡ 90)
¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the
TV Guide system may not be able to receive any data.
¾ When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take
a few hours.
¾ When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a
long time. Format the disc or card. (➡ 81)
Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.
¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as Progressive
“No Data” is displayed for some or all stations.
¾ Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system.
¾ Programme the Timer recording manually. (➡ 23)
JPEG, etc., may not play back. (➡ 112)
The TV Guide information is not displayed
properly.
¾ There was a programme change.
Music
Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.
¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS
Check the current programme, e.g., on the Web site for the TV
Guide system provider or station provider.
restrictions, they will not be copied.
¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA
specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
¾ Bonus tracks may not be copied.
The TV Guide data transfer was interrupted.
¾ The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to
the interruption.
¾ The programme information may be incomplete.
Title of the newly released CD cannot be
acquired.
¾ Title cannot be acquired if the title is not registered in the built-
The TV Guide data is not updated.
¾ Make sure that the time is set correctly. (➡ 90)
in Gracenote® Database. Connection to the network is
necessary to acquire title for the newly released CD. (➡ 98)
Digital broadcast
ID3 tag of an MP3 file is not completely
displayed.
Digital broadcasts cannot be received.
¾ Only the track name and artist name can be displayed with this
¾ Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.
¾ The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station,
or the direction of the aerial may have changed due to strong
winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV
aerial installer.
unit.
After Auto Tuning only some or no DVB channels
are found.
¾ Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions.
¾ If you live in a unit or apartment, check to ensure the Master
Antenna TV (MATV) system is designed for DVB-T reception.
Please consult your body corporate.
RQT9487
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
To reset this unit
Picture regularly breaks up on some channels.
“No signal” message is displayed.
¾ Check “DVB Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal
Strength” are displayed in red or constantly changing, check
aerial. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
(➡ 84)
¾ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household
appliances such as light switches, fridges etc. may cause
picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality
quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and
antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
¾ Check aerial connection.
To return all the settings other than the main
ones to the factory preset
¾ Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the
settings except for the ratings level and ratings PIN etc. return
to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled. (➡ 90)
¾ Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the
settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, disc
language settings, ratings level, ratings PIN, remote control
code, and network settings etc. return to the factory presets.
(➡ 90)
¾ Press and hold [1 CH] and [2 CH] on the main unit until the
Auto Tuning screen appears. All the settings except for the
ratings level, ratings PIN and clock settings etc. return to the
factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled.
¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the
Setup menu. (➡ 84)
Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or
all channels.
¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant
lighting storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may
cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort
momentarily.
To reset the ratings level settings
¾ While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select
the DVD drive, then press and hold [ REC] and [ /×1.3] on
the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
*
q
¾ Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical
appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy”
ignition system.
To restore the unit if it freezes due to one of the
safety devices being activated
¾ Press and hold [ ] on the main unit for 3 seconds. (The
8
VIERA Link
settings remain.)
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is
displayed on the front display when the power for the main unit
is set to On.
¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (➡ 89)
¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.
¾ Some functions may not work if depending on the version of
“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit
supports “HDAVI Control 4” functions.
¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was
changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was
removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”
may not work.
Network
I can’t connect to the network.
¾ Has the LAN cable come unplugged? Check that the LAN
cable is properly connected. (➡ 98)
¾ Have you plugged in a modular cable for use with a telephone
into the LAN terminal on this unit? Connect with a straight LAN
cable. (➡ 98)
¾ Is the power for the modem or broadband router turned on?
Turn the power on for each device.
¾ Is there a mistake in the network settings? Follow any
instructions you may have received from your ISP (Internet
Service Provider) and make changes to the settings.
¾ Are the broadband router settings correct? Read the operating
instructions for the broadband router.
¾ Is the broadband router and/or modem correctly connected?
Check the operating instructions for each device and connect
accordingly.
In this case, perform the following operations.
1
When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with
the power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.
2
Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”
function to off, and then set to on again. (For more
information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit,
and after this unit’s screen is displayed check that “HDAVI
Control” is working.
3
While using my PC, I cannot connect to the
network.
¾ Does your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or service contract
prevent multiple terminals connecting at the same time? Check
the content of your contract.
The operation on this unit (music playback etc.)
is interrupted.
¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press
buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA
Link functions.
Other
After performing an update, you can no longer
receive broadcasts.
¾ Depending on the content of the update, some settings may
have returned to the preset values. Fix the settings again.
Pause Live TV stops.
¾ Pause Live TV from AV1 or AV2 input stops when a timer
recording in a recording mode other than DR started.
RQT9487
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Recording system
Audio
Recording system:
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format
Dolby Digital 2ch (XP, SP, LP, EP mode),
Linear PCM (XP mode),
DVD-R: DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): DVD-Video format
Dolby Digital Max 5.1ch (DVB-T)
(DR mode, HG, HX, HE, HL mode),
HE-AAC 2ch (DVB-T) (DR mode),
MPEG 2ch (DR mode)
DVD-RW: DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Audio in:
AV1/AV2 (pin jack)
Input level:
Input impedance:
Audio out:
Output level:
Output impedance:
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
Coaxial terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
More than 10 kΩ
Audio Out (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Less than 1 kΩ
Recordable discs
DVD-RAM:
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
DVD-R (SL):
DVD-R (DL):
DVD-RW:
HDMI terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
+R (SL):
HDMI Output
19 pin type A: 1 pc
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM
)
+R (DL):
+RW:
ꢁThis unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
Internal HDD capacity
250 GB
Maximum writing speed of discs
DV input
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc
Type A: 1 pc
DVD-RAM:
DVD-R:
DVD-R DL:
DVD-RW:
+R:
+R DL:
+RW:
Up to 5x speed
Up to 12x speed
Up to 4x speed
Up to 4x speed
Up to 8x speed
Up to 4x speed
Up to 4x speed
USB port
SD Card Slot
LAN (Ethernet) Port
1 pc
10 BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Television system
Tuner system
Maximum supporting speed of drive for each discs ; Refer to
“Recordable discs” (➡ above).
Channel coverage
Note
DVB-T
21 to 69
New Zealand
ꢁWhen recording or playing while copying, this unit may not copy at
the maximum speed.
ꢁDepending on the condition of the disc, this unit may not copy at
the maximum speed.
RF converter output:
Not provided
Others
Region code:
#4
5 °C to 40 °C
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Approx. 37 W
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Dimensions (W×H×D):
Mass:
Playable discs
DVD-RAM:
DVD-R:
DVD Video Recording format, AVCHD format, JPEG
DVD-Video formatꢂ1, AVCHD formatꢂ1, MP3ꢂ1, 2
,
JPEGꢂ1, 2, DivXꢂ1, 2
DVD-Video formatꢂ1, AVCHD formatꢂ1,
MP3ꢂ1, 2, JPEGꢂ1, 2, DivXꢂ1, 2
430 mm × 59 mm × 330 mm
Approx. 4.3 kg
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 0.7 W (Power Save mode: ON)
Approx. 10 W (Power Save mode: OFF)
DVD-RW:
DVD-Video formatꢂ1, DVD Video Recording format,
AVCHD formatꢂ1
+Rꢂ1, +R DL (Double Layer)ꢂ1, +RW
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA)
CD-R/CD-RW:
CD-DAꢂ1, MP3ꢂ1, 2, JPEGꢂ1, 2, DivXꢂ1, 2
Optical pick-up
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
Wave length:
CD
780 nm wave length
662 nm wave length
DVD
Laser power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
Video
Video system:
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)/MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Recording system:
Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
Component video output
(PAL 576i/576p/720p/1080i, NTSC 480i/480p/720p/1080i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
RQT9487
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
SD Card
SD (Standard Definition)-Video
Slot:
SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc
SD Memory Cardꢂ3, SDHC Memory Card
FAT12, FAT16ꢂ4 (In case of SD Memory Card)
FAT32ꢂ4 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)
SD ꢂ5 USB ꢂ6
Playable
media
Compatible media:
Format:
Codec
MPEG2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
File format
SD-Video format conforming
Data that can be played: JPEG, SD (Standard Definition)-Videoꢂ5,
HD (High Definition)-Video
HD (High Definition)-Video
SD USB ꢂ7
USB device
USB standard:
Format:
Playable
media
USB 2.0 High Speed
FAT16, FAT32
Codec
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Data that can be played:
MP3, JPEG, DivX,
SD (Standard Definition)-Videoꢂ6,
HD (High Definition)-Videoꢂ7
File format
AVCHD format conforming
-R -R DL CD
MP3
ꢁThis unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
ꢁOperation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders and some files (tracks) may not display or
be playable.
ꢁEnglish alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
ꢁThe display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
ꢁDepending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders may not play in the order you numbered them.
ꢁThis unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
ꢁDepending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
HDD -R -R DL CD USB
Playable
media
File format
MP3
ꢁFiles must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
Compression 32 kbps to 320 kbps
rates
Sampling rate 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz
Number of
folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable (except
for HDD) : 300 folders (including the root folder)
Number of
Maximum number of files recognizable (except for
files
HDD) : 3000 files
Note
ꢁSpecifications are subject to change without notice.
ꢁUseable capacity will be less. (SD card)
ID3 tags
compatible
JPEG
ꢂ1 Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.
ꢂ2 ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended formats) and Joliet
This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-
R DL).
HDD RAM -R -R DL CD SD USB
Playable
media
File format
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera
File system)
ꢁFiles must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
ꢂ3 Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
Includes microSD cards. (A microSD adaptor needs to be
inserted.)
Compatible
pixels
Between 34 × 34 and 8192 × 8192 pixels
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
ꢂ4 Long file name is unsupported.
Thawing Time Approx. 2 sec. in case of SD Card (8.1 M pixels,
JPEG)
ꢂ5 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from SD
card to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
CD
Number of
folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 99
folders (including the root folder)
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-
RAM disc is completed, the playback becomes possible.
ꢂ6 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB
device to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-
RAM disc is completed, the playback becomes possible.
ꢂ7 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB
device to HDD.
HDD RAM -R -R DL SD USB
Maximum number
of folders recognizable: 300 folders (including the
root folder)
CD
Number of
files
Maximum number of files recognizable: 999
files
RAM -R -R DL SD USB
Maximum number of
files recognizable: 3000 files
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD is
completed, the playback becomes possible.
HDD
Maximum number of files recognizable: 9999
files
MOTION
JPEG
not supported
Progressive
JPEG
ꢁIt may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
ꢁWhen there are many files and/or folders, some files may not
display or be playable.
DivX
-R -R DL CD USB
Playable
media
File format
DivX
ꢁFiles must have the
extension “.DIVX” or
“.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.
Number of
folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300
folders (including the root folder)
Number of
Maximum number of files recognizable: 200 files
files
Support
version
Official DivX® Certified product.
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including
DivX®6) with standard playback of DivX® media
files. Certified to the DivX Home Theatre Profile.
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not
supported. DivX, DivX Certified, and associated
logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used
under license.
RQT9487
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SD
■ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on the
method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in
the order you numbered the folders.
ꢅꢅꢅ: Numbers
XXX: Letters
Card
DCIM
Structure of MP3 folders
CD USB
XXXXX
(Picture folder)
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in
the order you want to play
them.
XXXX
.JPG
Root
001 Folder
Any folder with JPEG files
(file=track)
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
e.g.,
001
002 Folder
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
003 Folder
P0000001.JPG
P0000002.JPG
(MPEG2 folder)
SD_VIDEO
PRG
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Order of play
MOV
MOV
PRG
.MOD
.MOI
.PGI
Structures of still picture folders
CD USB
MGR_INFO
Files inside a folder are
displayed in the order they
were updated or taken.
Root
(MPEG2 information folder)
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
PRIVATE
#8%*&ꢀ
002 Folder
(AVCHD folder)
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
003 Folder
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
004 Folder
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
Order of play
RAM
The following
ꢅꢅꢅ: Numbers
can be displayed on this unit.
XXX: Letters
ꢂ1 Still pictures on the root
folder can also be
Root
1
XXXX
JPEG
.JPG
displayed.
ꢂ2 Folders can be created on
other equipment. However,
these folders cannot be
selected as a copying
destination.
DCIM
XXXXX
XXXX
.JPG
ꢁIf a folder name or file name
has been input using other
equipment, the name may
not be displayed properly or
you may not be able to play
or edit the data.
2
DCIM
XXXXX
XXXX
.JPG
RQT9487
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
AVCHD
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
AVCHD is a new format (standard) for Panasonic’s video camera,
etc. that can be used to record and play high-resolution HD images.
Bitstream
=
+
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1
channel) before it is decoded into its various channels.
Frame
Field
Field
Decoder
ꢁA frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
ꢁA field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on discs to normal. This
is called decoding.
Deep Colour
This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology
that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when
connected to a compatible TV.
Gateway
IP address of the electronic device providing Internet access.
Usually called a router IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.1)
You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with
smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour banding.
[A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be
reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep
Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the
connected TV.]
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the
reading and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
DivX
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality
that maintains a relatively small file size.
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-
definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.
DNS Server
A server which acts like a telephone directory and translates
Internet domain names into IP addresses.
Hub
Used for connecting more than one device to the network.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio.
IP address
A set of numbers which distinguish each PC on the network when,
for example, connected to the Internet. When using a PC in a LAN
to access a PC or device that is not included in the LAN, the IP
address is called the local IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.10)
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into fewer channels.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc (DVD)
and SD card (SD).These perform the reading and writing of data.
DTS (Digital Theatre Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theatres. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
LAN (Local Area Network)
A group of linked devices in a company, school or home. Indicates
the boundaries of a particular network.
Dynamic range
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs.
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite
based digital broadcasting.
Film and video
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
MPEG-4AVC/H.264
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG-4AVC/H.264 is an encoding method used for recording of
the high definition videos.
Film:
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs
recorded at 30 frames per second as well.) Generally
appropriate for motion picture films.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality.
Video:
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL
discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs).
Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or
animation.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video is produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan&Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,
etc. possible on equipment that can play such media.
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for
recording again.
Pan&Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture
itself appears in an aspect ratio of
16:9.
Folder
This is a place on the hard disk, disc, USB memory or SD card
where groups of data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it
refers to the place where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2, etc. are
stored.
Progressive/Interlace
Interlace is a conventional image signal that displays the image in 2
phases by splitting the display into odd and even scans. Progressive
will display whole image in 1 scan. Therefore, it will give high
definition image without flickering compared with interlace.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD cards and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
RQT9487
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses
them. By dividing the video signal into the three colours for
transmission, noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Router
Distinguishes the IP address assigned to each device, such as the
PC, and relays the flow of data within the network.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analogue signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered
values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the
quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The
channels you can receive are affected by weather conditions,
seasons, time (day/night), region, length of the cable that is
connected to the aerial, etc.
Subnet mask
Enables efficient network use. A set of numbers which identify which
part of the IP address allocated to every device connected to the
router is the network portion.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
VIERA CAST
An information service unique to Panasonic where specific Web
sites can be viewed on this unit by connecting to the Internet
without using a PC.
x.v.ColourTM
x.v.ColourTM is a name for devices that are compatible with the
xvYCC format, an international standard for expanded colour in
motion pictures, and that follow the rules for signal transmission.
You can enjoy vivid colours of wider colour ranges for a more
realistic picture when connected to a TV that supports the
x.v.ColourTM with HDMI cable.
1080i
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines
pass every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image.
Because 1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television
broadcasts of 480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a
more realistic and rich image.
1080p
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
720p
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
RQT9487
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety precaution
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIRYOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile
telephone.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and
easily accessible.
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily
operable.
To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains,
disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR
PRODUCT DAMAGE,
ꢁDO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,
DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS
FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE
PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
ꢁUSE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
ꢁDO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK);THERE ARE NO
USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION!
ꢁDO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED.TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY
OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE
VENTILATION VENTS.
ꢁDO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS
WITH NEWSPAPERS,TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND
SIMILAR ITEMS.
ꢁDO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS
LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.
(Inside of product)
ꢁDISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY MANNER.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
The recording and playback of content on this or any other device may require permission from the owner of the copyright or other such
rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to and does not grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims any right, ability or
intention to obtain such permission on your behalf. It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of this or any other device complies with
applicable copyright legislation in your country. Please refer to that legislation for more information on the relevant laws and regulations
involved or contact the owner of the rights in the content you wish to record or playback.
Placement
Foreign matter
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock
or malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from
the power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the
unit and cause a fire.
Service
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
AC mains lead protection
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
RQT9487
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
License
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide
patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS,
Inc.© 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this
copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
y SDHC Logo is a trademark.
y Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use of
a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (“AVC/VC-1 Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1
Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider
licensed to provide AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from
MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.
“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
VIERA CASTTM is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
Plays DivX® video
DivX® is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under license.
YouTube and Picasa are trademarks of Google, Inc.
Gracenote® Corporate Description
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates,
you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves
all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you
for any information that you provide.You agree that Gracenote, Inc.
may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in
its own name.
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content delivery.
For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
Gracenote® Proprietary Legends
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright ©
2000-2009 Gracenote.This product and service may practice
one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207,
#6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending.
Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote
service.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are
licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or
implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data
from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any
cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that
the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that
functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new
enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may
provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any
time.
Gracenote® End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE
TERMS BELOW.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote
(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc
and/or file identification and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”)
from online servers or embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions.You may use
Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions
of this application or device.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL
BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal
non-commercial use only.You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third
party.YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
RQT9487
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Adjust the audio quality (Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Adjust the picture quality (Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Album (Music)
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Album (Still picture)
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Audio
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
AVCHD
Discs
Disc name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Discs that cannot be played. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Discs you can use for recording and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Play-only discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Display
Digital channel information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Divide Title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41, 112, 114
DR File Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 44
DR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DV Automatic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
DVB Signal Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Edit
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Channel
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chasing playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Clock Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Connection
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 114
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 85, 114
FR (Flexible Recording Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
FUNCTION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 97
Amplifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Digital Audio Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 96
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
S VIDEO terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17, 95–97
Video cassette recorder (VCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
VIDEO terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 97
Copy
HD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 46–52
Copy Title Playing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
HDD
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Handling care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting with a receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Settings (HDMI Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
HD Video
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 114
Language
Code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Soundtrack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 85
Subtitle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 76, 85
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 114
Deep Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Delete
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
All titles (DVD-RAM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
All titles (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Digital Audio Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Digital broadcast
Digital channel information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
DVB Signal Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Multiple audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 22
New Channel Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Subtitle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 20
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Manual Skip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Menu
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Mode
Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
MPEG2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Music
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Play (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Play (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Play (Music on HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 38
Name
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Entering text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
RQT9487
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subtitle
Network
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc (Disc menu) . . . . . . . . 76
Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
New Channel Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
One Touch Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Timer recording
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Using the TV Guide System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Title
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 46–52
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 32, 35
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Partial Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Playing back
DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
HD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Playlist
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Progressive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 114
Properties
USB
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Protection
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Copy (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Play (Still picture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
TM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
VIERA CAST
Quick View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
VIERA Link (HDAVI Control)
Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 96
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
x.v.ColourTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Ratings level
DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Auto Renewal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
DV Automatic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Recording via AV2 input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 32–35
Recording to discs from external equipment
2 programmes simultaneous recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DV Automatic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Recording via AV2 input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
SD card
Copy (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Play (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Play (Still picture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SD Video
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Software (Firmware) Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Still picture
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
RQT9487
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-If you see this symbol-
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no
compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to
a problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no
responsibility and offers no compensation for any
subsequent damage caused by such loss. Examples of
causes of such losses are
ꢁA disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD
Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another
company.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the
European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please
contact your local authorities or dealer and ask
for the correct method of disposal.
ꢁA disc used as described above and then played again in this
unit.
ꢁA disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer
disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this
unit.
Panasonic Corporation
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
En
RQT9487-L
H0609AY0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Miele Refrigerator KWT 1601 Vi User Manual
Multi Tech Systems Network Card MT3334ZDX User Manual
NEC Projector M271W User Manual
NETGEAR Network Hardware WNCE3001 100NAS User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill 831298800 User Manual
Nortel Networks Network Card EMC User Manual
NuTone Door LA 206WH User Manual
Oricom Two Way Radio PMR888 User Manual
Ozaki Worldwide Portable Speaker dotodot50 User Manual
Panasonic All in One Printer KX FLB758HK User Manual